2006 G Coupe/Sedan Owner's Manual Infiniti G35 Sedan Owners

User Manual: 2006 Infiniti G35 Sedan Owners Manual Troubleshoot 2006 Infiniti G35 Sedan |

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 344 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2006 Infiniti G35 Coupe/Sedan
OM6E-0V35U0/OM6E-GV35U0
Table of Contents

Foreword

Your INFINITI represents a new way of

thinking about vehicle design. It inte-

grates advanced engineering and supe-

rior craftsmanship with a simple, refined

aesthetic sensitivity associated with tra-

ditional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxury

and beauty. The car itself is important,

but so is the sense of harmony that the

vehicle evokes in its driver, and the

sense of satisfaction you feel with the

INFINITI — from the way it looks and

drives to the high level of retailer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to

the fullest, we encourage you to read this

Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains

all of the features, controls and perfor-

mance characteristics of your INFINITI; it

also provides important instructions and

safety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

can be found in your Owner’s literature

portfolio. The INFINITI Service and Mainte-

nance Guide explains details about main-

taining and servicing your vehicle. Always

carry it with you when you take your

INFINITI to an authorized retailer. The

portfolio contents provide complete infor-

mation about all warranties covering this

vehicle, the periodic maintenance re-

quired to keep the warranties in effect as

well as the INFINITI Roadside Assistance

program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care

and Lemon Law Information Booklet will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s

lemon law.

INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satis-

fying ownership experience for as long as

you own your car. Should you have any

questions regarding your INFINITI or an

INFINITI dealer, please contact our Con-

sumer Affairs department at:

In U.S. 1-800-662-6200.

In Canada 1-800-361-4792.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE

SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read

your Owner’s Manual carefully. This will

ensure familiarity with controls and main-

tenance requirements, assisting you in

the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help

ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and

your passengers!

ONever drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs.

OAlways observe posted speed limits and

never drive too fast for conditions.

OAlways use seat belts and child re-

straints. Pre-teen children should be

seated in the rear seat.

OAlways provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to all

occupants of the vehicle.

OAlways review this Owner’s Manual for

important safety information.

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modi-

fication could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate

governmental regulations. In addition,

damage or performance problems re-

sulting from modifications may not be

covered under INFINITI warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all

options available on this model. There-

fore, you may find some information that

does not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illus-

trations in this manual are those in effect

at the time of printing. INFINITI reserves

the right to change specifications or de-

sign at any time without notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this

manual. They are used in the following

ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-

ard that could cause death or serious per-

sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the

procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-

ard that could cause minor or moderate per-

sonal injury or damage to your vehicle. To

avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must

be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do

this or Do not let this happen.

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to

the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar

to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar

to these call attention to an item in the il-

lustration.

SIC0697

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and

certain vehicle components contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-

ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products of

component wear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects or other reproductive

harm.

BLUETOOTH is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc., U.S.A. and licenced to

Xanavi Informatics Corpora-

tion.

TOKYO, JAPAN

be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or trans-

mitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without

the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints........... 0-2

Exterior............................................................. 0-3

Sedan model............................................... 0-3

Coupe model............................................... 0-5

Passenger compartment ................................... 0-7

Sedan model............................................... 0-7

Coupe model .............................................. 0-8

Instrument panel.............................................. 0-9

Meters and gauges.......................................... 0-11

Engine compartment ....................................... 0-12

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(Page 1-36)

2. Front seat belts (P.1-9)

3. Front head restraints (P.1-8)

4. Supplemental side air bags (P.1-36)

5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bags (P.1-36)

6. Rear seat belts (P.1-9)

7. Rear head restraints (P.1-8)

8. Child restraint anchor points (for top

tether strap child restraint) (P.1-26)

9. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor) (P.1-42)

10. Front seats (P.1-2)

11. Pre-tensioner seat belt system (P.1-50)

12. Rear seats (P.1-5)

— Child restraints (P.1-18)

13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P.1-25)

SSI0161

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

SEDAN MODEL

1. Engine hood (P.3-24)

2. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P.2-21)

3. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P.2-19)

4. Windshield (P.8-21)

5. Sunroof* (P.2-42)

6. Power windows (P.2-39)

7. Recovery hook (P.6-15)

8. Fog light switch (P.2-25)

9. Front side marker light (P.8-33)

10. Tire pressure (P.8-37)

11. Flat tire (P.6-2)

12. Tire chains (P.8-44)

13. Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) (P.2-12, 5-3)

14. Mirrors (P.3-32)

15. Door locks, keyfob, keys (P.3-3)

16. Trunk lid (P.3-25)

17. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-27)

18. Rear window defogger switch (P.2-20)

19. Satellite antenna (P.4-14)

20. Fuel-filler door (P.3-28)

SSI0155

EXTERIOR

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

21. Rear combination light (P.8-33)

22. Child safety locks (P.3-5)

*: if so equipped

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

COUPE MODEL

1. Engine hood (P.3-24)

2. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P.2-21)

3. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P.2-19)

4. Windshield (P.8-21)

5. Sunroof* (P.2-42)

6. Power windows (P.2-39)

7. Recovery hook (P.6-15)

8. Fog light switch (P.2-25)

9. Front side marker light (P.8-33)

10. Tire pressure (P.8-37)

11. Flat tire (P.6-2)

12. Tire chains (P.8-44)

13. Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) (P.2-12, 5-3)

14. Mirrors (P.3-32)

15. Door locks, keyfob, keys (P.3-3)

16. Trunk lid (P.3-25)

17. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-27)

18. Rear window defogger switch

(P.2-20)

19. Fuel-filler door (P.3-28)

SSI0156

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

20. Rear combination light (P.8-33)

*: if so equipped

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

SEDAN MODEL

1. Automatic anti-glare mirror,

HomeLink (P.3-32, 2-46)

2. Sunglasses holder (P.2-32)

3. Interior lights (P.2-44)

4. Sunroof* (P.2-42)

5. Sun visor (P.3-32)

6. Power window switch/Power door

lock switch (P.2-39, 3-4)

7. Front seat (P.1-2)

8. Rear personal light (P.2-45)

9. Rear cup holder (P.2-34)

10. Armrest (P.1-9)

11. Selector lever

— Automatic transmission (P.5-12)

— Manual transmission (P.5-16)

12. Front cup holder (P.2-32)

13. Automatic drive positioner

switches* (P.3-34)

14. Console box (P.2-36)

15. Rear seat (P.1-5)

*: if so equipped

SSI0157

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

COUPE MODEL

1. Automatic anti-glare mirror, HomeLink

(P.3-32, 2-46)

2. Sunglasses holder (P.2-32)

3. Interior lights (P.2-44)

4. Sunroof* (P.2-42)

5. Sun visor (P.3-32)

6. Power window switch/Power door lock

switch (P.2-39, 3-4)

7. Front seat (P.1-2)

8. Coat hook (P.2-38)

9. Selector lever or Shift lever

— Automatic transmission (P.5-12)

— Manual transmission (P.5-16)

10. Parking brake (P.5-19)

11. Automatic drive positioner switches*

(P.3-34)

12. Front cup holder (P.2-32)

13. Console box (P.2-36)

14. Walk-in mechanism* (P.1-4)

15. Shoulder belt guide (P.1-17)

16. Rear cup holder (P.2-34)

17. Rear seat (P.1-5)

*: if so equipped

SSI0158

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Headlight, fog light and turn signal

switch (P.2-21)

2. Security indicator light (P.2-19)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(P.4-28) or steering wheel switch for

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System

(if so equipped) (P.4-30)

4. Driver’s supplemental front air bag

(P.1-36)/Horn (P.2-26)

5. Meters/gauges (P.2-3)

6. Cruise control main/set switch (P.5-20)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P.2-19)

8. Center ventilator (P.4-9)

9. Center display - Compass, Air condi-

tioner, Ambient temperature, Front

passenger air bag status light (P.1-44)

10. Rear window and outside mirror de-

fogger switch (P.2-20)

11. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-10)

12. Clock (P.2-29)

13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P.4-2)

14. Passenger’s supplemental front air

bag (P.1-36)

15. Upper glove box (except for Naviga-

tion system equipped models)

(P.2-35)

16. Side ventilator (P.4-9)

17. Hood lock release handle (P.3-24)

18. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-25)

19. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (P.2-28)

20. Instrument brightness control

(P.2-24)

21. Outside mirror remote control switch

(P.3-33)

22. Fuse box (P.8-27)

23. Electric steering column control (if so

equipped) (P.3-31)

24. Manual steering column control

(P.3-30)

25. Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-6)

26. SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-27)

27. Audio system (P.4-14)

28. Ashtray/Cigarette lighter (P.2-30)

29. Heated seat switch (P.2-26)

SSI0159

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

30. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P.2-25)

31. Glove box (P.2-35)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-9)

2. Tachometer (P.2-4)

3. Automatic transmission position indi-

cator (AT models) (P.5-12)/Manual

transmission up-shift indicator (MT

models) (P.5-16)

4. Speedometer (P.2-3)

5. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P.2-4)

6. Trip odometer reset switch (P.2-3)

7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip) (P.2-3)/Up-

shift indicator setting (MT models)

8. Fuel gauge (P.2-5)

SSI0075

METERS AND GAUGES

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

VQ35DE

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-25)

2. Battery (P.8-16)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-10)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-14)

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (MT models)

(P.8-15)

6. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

7. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)

8. Window washer fluid reservoir

(P.8-15)

9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-9)

10. Drive belts (P.8-19)

11. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-10)

12. Air cleaner (P.8-20)

SSI0160

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system

Seats ................................................................ 1-2

Front power seat adjustment ....................... 1-2

Rear seat adjustment................................... 1-5

Head restraint adjustment ........................... 1-8

Active head restraint (front seats)................ 1-8

Armrest (if so equipped) .............................. 1-9

Seat belts ......................................................... 1-9

Precautions on seat belt usage.................... 1-9

Child safety................................................ 1-12

Pregnant women ........................................ 1-13

Injured persons .......................................... 1-13

Three-point type seat belt with retractor..... 1-13

Seat belt extenders .................................... 1-17

Seat belt maintenance................................ 1-17

Child restraints................................................ 1-18

Precautions on child restraints................... 1-18

Child restraint installation on rear seat

outboard or center positions ..................... 1-20

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) SYSTEM ...................................... 1-25

Top tether strap child restraint ................. 1-26

Child restraint installation on front

passenger seat .......................................... 1-28

Booster seats .................................................. 1-31

Precautions on booster seats ..................... 1-31

Booster seat installation on rear seat

outboard or center positions...................... 1-34

Booster seat installation on front

passenger seat .......................................... 1-35

Supplemental restraint system........................ 1-36

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system....................................................... 1-36

INFINITI advanced air bag system (front

seats) ........................................................ 1-42

Supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag systems...................... 1-48

Supplemental air bag warning labels.......... 1-51

Supplemental air bag warning light............ 1-51

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

ODo not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be danger-

ous. The shoulder belt will not be

against your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and receive neck

or other serious injuries. You could also

slide under the lap belt and receive se-

rious internal injuries.

OFor the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

later in this section.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

WARNING

ODo not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

ODo not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

Operating tips

OThe seat motor has an auto-reset over-

load protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 sec-

onds, then reactivate the switch.

ODo not operate the power seat for a

long period of time when the engine is

off. This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in the

“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”

for automatic seat positioner operation (if

so equipped).

SSS0133B

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Forward and backward

Moving the switch

forward or back-

ward will slide the seat forward or back-

ward to the desired position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch

backward

until the desired angle is obtained. To

bring the seatback forward again, move

the switch forward and move your body

forward. The seatback will move forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help ob-

tain proper seat belt fit. See “Precautions

on seat belt usage” later in this section.

The seatback may also be reclined to

allow occupants to rest when the vehicle

is parked.

Seat lifter (Driver’s seat)

Pull the switch up or push it down to ad-

just the angle and height of the seat.

SSS0182C SSS0183

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides

lower back support to the driver. Move

the lever up or down to adjust the seat

lumbar area.

Walk-in mechanism (Coupe)

This feature makes it easier to get in and

out of the rear seat.

Use the following procedure when getting

in and out of the rear seat.

1. Pull the seatback lever upward

pull the walk-in lever

on the side of

the front seat upward to fold the front

seatback down.

2. To slide the front seat forward, push

the seatback switch

below the

seatback lever. The front seat will

move forward.

3. Get in or out of the vehicle.

4. Push the seatback switch

again to

return the front seat to its original po-

sition and raise the seatback.

OThe front passenger seat will stop at 7

in (175 mm) from its front most posi-

tion to retain space for the rear pas-

senger.

CAUTION

ODo not raise the seatback before re-

SSS0184 SSS0577

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

turning the front seat to its original posi-

tion.

OWhen returning the seat to its original

position, confirm the seat and seatback

are locked properly.

OBe careful not to pinch your hand or foot

or bump your head when operating the

walk-in seat. The seatback will fold down

rapidly.

ODo not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. They may be

pinched and damaged.

ORemove the seat belt from the seat belt

guide when operating the walk-in

mechanism to prevent the belt from

being stretched along with the seat

movement.

The automatic forwarding and reversing

will not work or stop under the following

conditions:

OWhen the vehicle speed is above 4

MPH (7 km/h).

OWhen the seat belt is fastened.

OWhen the selector lever is not in the P

(Park) position (Automatic transmis-

sion model’s driver’s seat) or the

parking brake is not applied (Manual

transmission model’s driver’s seat).

OWhen the door is closed.

OWhen the seat is raised or when the

seatback switch, recline switch or

slide switch is operated during auto-

matic operation.

REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Reclining (if so equipped)

1. Pull the adjusting lever.

2. Tilt the seatback to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the

seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help ob-

tain proper seat belt fit. See “Precautions

on seat belt usage” later in this section.

SSS0185

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The seatback may also be reclined to

allow occupants to rest when the vehicle

is parked.

WARNING

ODo not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be danger-

ous. The shoulder belt will not be

against your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and receive neck

or other serious injuries. You could also

slide under the lap belt and receive se-

rious internal injuries.

OFor the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

later in this section.

OAfter adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

Folding

Sedan:

The rear center seatback can be folded to

allow access to the trunk from inside the

vehicle.

To access the trunk:

1. Fold down the rear center seatback

2. Unlock the trunk access window lid

To unlock, insert the master key or the

mechanical key (Intelligent Key

equipped model) to the key cylinder

on the lid and turn it counterclockwise

. Turning the key clockwise

will

lock the lid.

3. Pull out the trunk access window lid

Remove the key when opening or closing

the trunk access window lid. Otherwise,

the trunk access window lid may be dam-

aged.

SSS0551

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Coupe:

The rear seatback can be folded to allow

access to the trunk from the inside of the

vehicle.

To access the trunk:

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Pull the handle located on the left side

of the trunk. The rear seatback will be

unlatched.

3. Fold the rear seatback down.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo

higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

To return the seatback:

1. Fold up the rear seatback.

2. Securely lock the seatback in position.

When the seatback is latched, the seat

lock indicator

on the seatback will

be lowered.

SSS0220 SSS0219 SSS0553

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up.

To lower, push the lock knob

and push

the head restraint down.

Adjust the head restraints so the center is

level with the center of your ears.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted properly

as they may provide significant protection

against injury in an accident. Do not remove

them. Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front

seats)

WARNING

OAlways adjust the head restraints prop-

erly as specified in the previous section.

Failure to do so can reduce the effective-

ness of the active head restraint.

OActive head restraints are designed to

supplement other safety systems. Al-

ways wear seat belts. No system can

SSS0288 SSS0178A SSS0508

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

prevent all injuries in any accident.

ODo not attach anything to the head re-

straint stalks. Doing so could impair ac-

tive head restraint function.

The active head restraint moves forward

utilizing the force that the seatback re-

ceives from the occupant in a rear-end

collision. The movement of the head re-

straint helps support the occupant’s head

by reducing its backward movement and

helping absorb some of the forces that

may lead to whiplash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for col-

lisions at low to medium speeds in which

it is said that whiplash injury occurs

most.

Active head restraints operate only in cer-

tain rear-end collisions. After the colli-

sion, the head restraints return to their

original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints

as described in the previous section.

ARMREST (if so equipped)

Pull the armrest forward until it is hori-

zontal.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat, your chances of

being injured or killed in an accident

and/or the severity of injury may be

greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encour-

ages you and all of your passengers to

buckle up every time you drive, even if

your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most states, provinces or territories re-

quire that seat belts be worn at all times

when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0186

SEAT BELTS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

OEvery person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat and, if appropri-

ate, in a child restraint.

OThe seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire re-

straint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur if

the seat belt is not worn properly.

OAlways route the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never

run the belt behind your back, under

your arm or across your neck. The belt

should be away from your face and neck,

but not falling off your shoulder.

OPosition the lap belt as low and snug as

possible around the hips, not the waist.

A lap belt worn too high could increase

the risk of internal injuries in an acci-

dent.

OBe sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

ODo not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its effec-

tiveness.

ODo not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

ONever carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

OIf the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned ON

with all doors closed and all seat belts

fastened, it may indicate a malfunction

in the system. Have the system checked

by an INFINITI dealer.

OOnce the pre-tensioner seat belt has ac-

tivated, it cannot be reused and must be

replaced together with the retractor. See

an INFINITI dealer.

SSS0136A

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

ORemoval and installation of the pre-

tensioner seat belt system components

should be done by an INFINITI dealer.

OAll seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware, should

be inspected after any collision by an

INFINITI dealer. INFINITI recommends

that all seat belt assemblies in use

during a collision be replaced unless the

collision was minor and the belts show

no damage and continue to operate

properly. Seat belt assemblies not in

use during a collision should also be in-

spected and replaced if either damage or

improper operation is noted.

OAll child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any colli-

sion. Always follow the restraint manu-

facturer’s inspection instructions and re-

placement recommendations. The child

restraints should be replaced if they are

damaged.

SSS0134A SSS0016

SSS0014

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, in-

cluding doctors, teachers, government

traffic safety offices, and community orga-

nizations. Every child is different, so be

sure to learn the best way to transport

your child.

There are three basic types of child re-

straint systems:

ORear-facing child restraint

OFront-facing child restraint

OBooster seat

The proper restraint depends on the

child’s size. Generally, infants (up to

about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg)

should be placed in rear-facing child re-

straints. Front-facing child restraints are

available for children who outgrow rear-

facing child restraints and are at least 1

year old. Booster seats are used to help

position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a

child who can no longer use a front-facing

child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protection.

The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them

properly. The shoulder belt may come too

close to the face or neck. The lap belt may

not fit over their small hip bones. In an acci-

dent, an improperly fitting seat belt could

cause serious or fatal injury. Always use ap-

propriate child restraints.

All US states and provinces of Canada re-

quire the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. (See “Child

restraints” later in this section.)

Also, there are other types of child re-

straints available for larger children for

additional protection.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat

if possible. According to accident statis-

tics, children are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seat than in the front

seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint

system (air bag system) for the front pas-

senger. See “Supplemental Restraint

System” later in this section for precau-

tions.

Infants

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

INFINITI recommends that infants be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

You should choose a child restraint that

fits your vehicle and always follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

Small children

Children that are over 1 year old and

weigh between 20 lb (9 kg) and 40 lb (18

kg) can be placed in a forward facing

child restraint. Refer to the manufactur-

er’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommen-

dations. INFINITI recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that

comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and

always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Larger children

Children who are too large for child re-

straints should be seated and restrained

by the seat belts which are provided. The

seat belt may not fit properly if the child

is less than 4 feet 9 inches (142.5 cm) tall

and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80

lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be used

to obtain proper seat belt fit.

INFINITI recommends that a child be

placed in a commercially available

booster seat if the shoulder belt in the

child’s seating position fits close to the

face or neck or if the lap portion of the

seat belt goes across the abdomen. The

booster seat should raise the child so

that the shoulder belt is properly posi-

tioned across the top, middle portion of

the shoulder and the lap belt is low on

the hips. A booster seat can only be used

in seating positions that have a three-

point type seat belt. The booster seat

should fit the vehicle seat and have a

label certifying that it complies with Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Once the child has grown so the shoulder

belt is no longer on or near the face and

neck, use the shoulder belt without the

booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat

and do not allow a child in the cargo areas

while the vehicle is moving. The child could

be seriously injured or killed in an accident

or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant

women use seat belts. The seat belt

should be worn snug, and always position

the lap belt as low as possible around the

hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder

belt over your shoulder and across your

chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt

over your abdominal area. Contact your

doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured persons

use seat belts, depending on the injury.

Check with your doctor for specific recom-

mendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

OEvery person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times.

ODo not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be danger-

ous. The shoulder belt will not be

against your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and receive neck

or other serious injuries. You could also

slide under the lap belt and receive se-

rious internal injuries.

OFor the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in

this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-

tractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle until it clicks.

• The retractor is designed to lock dur-

ing a sudden stop or on impact. A

slow pulling motion will permit the

belt to move, and allow you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

• If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then

smoothly pull the belt out of the re-

tractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack. Be

sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger and rear seat belts

have a locking mechanism for child re-

straint installation. It is referred to as the

automatic locking mode.

When the locking mechanism is activated

the seat belt cannot be extended again

until the seat belt tongue is detached

SSS0292

Front seat

SSS0293

Rear seat

SSS0290

Front seat

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

from the buckle and fully retracted. For

additional information, see “Child re-

straints” later in this section.

The automatic locking mode should be

used only for child restraint installation.

During normal seat belt use by a pas-

senger, the locking mode should not be ac-

tivated. If it is activated it may cause un-

comfortable seat belt tension. It can also

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position. If they are not com-

pletely secured, passengers may be injured

in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, push the button on

the buckle. The seat belt will automati-

cally retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to

lock belt movement using two separate

methods:

Owhen the belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor.

Owhen the vehicle slows down rapidly.

SSS0291A

Rear seat

SSS0326

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

You can check their operation as follows:

Ograsp the shoulder belt and pull for-

ward quickly. The retractor should lock

and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check or if you have any questions about

belt operation, see an INFINITI dealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(for Sedan front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best suited for

you. (See “Precautions on seat belt

usage” earlier in this section.) To adjust,

pull the release button

, and then move

the shoulder belt anchor

to the de-

sired position, so that the belt passes

over the center of the shoulder. The belt

should be away from your face and neck,

but not falling off of your shoulder. Re-

lease the adjustment button

to lock

the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

OAfter adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down to

make sure it is securely fixed in position.

OThe shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effective-

ness of the entire restraint system and

increase the chance or severity of injury

in an accident.

SSS0368

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)

The shoulder belt guides are attached on

the shoulders of the front seats to help

front occupants use the seat belts.

To use the shoulder belt guides, thread

the seat belt into the slot of the guide.

When you enter or exit the rear seat, re-

lease the seat belt from the shoulder belt

guide. Replace the seat belt in the guide

after rear seat access.

Always adjust the seat belt webbing

snugly. The shoulder belt guide can also

help assist proper fit and comfort. Always

make sure that the belt webbing is not

twisted and runs freely through the guide

when using it.

WARNING

Always route the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never run

the belt behind your back, under your arm or

across your neck. The belt should be away

from your face and neck, but not falling off

your shoulder. Use the shoulder belt guide

to help position the belt. Failure to properly

position the belt may reduce the effective-

ness of the entire restraint system and in-

crease the chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving posi-

tion, it is not possible to properly fit the

lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an ex-

tender is available. The extender adds ap-

proximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length

and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position. See an

INFINITI dealer for assistance if the ex-

tender is required.

WARNING

OOnly INFINITI seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should be

used with INFINITI seat belts.

OAdults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an ex-

tender. Such unnecessary use could re-

sult in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

ONever use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured in a collision or a

sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

OTo clean the seat belt webbings, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution

recommended for cleaning upholstery

or carpets. Then brush the seat belt

webbing, wipe it with a cloth and

allow it to dry in the shade. Do not al-

low the seat belts to retract until they

are completely dry.

SSS0578

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OIf dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the

seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

OPeriodically check that the seat belt

and all the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible

wires and anchors, work properly. If

loose parts, deterioration, cuts or

other damage on the seat belt web-

bing is found, the entire belt assembly

should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

OInfants and small children should always

be placed in an appropriate child re-

straint while riding in the vehicle. Failure

to use a child restraint can result in seri-

ous injury or death.

OInfants and small children should never

be carried on your lap. It is not possible

for even the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The child

could be crushed between the adult and

parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the

same seat belt around both your child

and yourself.

ONever install a rear-facing child restraint

in the front seat. An inflating supple-

mental air bag could seriously injure or

kill your child. A rear-facing child re-

straint must only be used in the rear

seat.

OINFINITI recommends that the child re-

straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

OAn improperly installed child restraint

could lead to serious injury or death in

an accident.

In general, child restraints are designed

to be installed with the lap portion of a

lap/shoulder seat belt. In addition, this

vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint lower anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system. Some child re-

straints include two rigid or webbing-

mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these lower anchors. For de-

tails, see “LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM” later in

this section.

Child restraints for infants and children of

various sizes are offered by several manu-

facturers. When selecting any child re-

straint, keep the following points in mind:

OChoose only a restraint with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

OCheck the child restraint in your ve-

hicle to be sure it is compatible with

the vehicle’s seat and seat belt

system.

OIf the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the

child restraint and check the various

adjustments to be sure the child re-

straint is compatible with your child.

Choose a child restraint that is de-

signed for your child’s height and

weight. Always follow all recom-

mended procedures.

All US states and Canadian provinces re-

quire that infants and small children be re-

strained in approved child restraints at all

times while the vehicle is being operated.

WARNING

OImproper use of a child restraint can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury for

both the child and other occupants of

the vehicle.

OFollow all of the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation and

use. When purchasing a child restraint,

be sure to select one which will fit your

child and vehicle. It may not be possible

to properly install some types of child re-

straints in your vehicle.

OIf the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being injured

in a collision or a sudden stop greatly in-

creases.

OAdjustable seatbacks should be posi-

tioned to fit the child restraint, but as

upright as possible.

OAfter attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the belt holds the re-

straint in place. The child restraint

should not move more than 1 in (25 mm).

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types

ofvehicles.

OIf you must install a front-facing child re-

straint in the front seat, see “Child re-

straint installation on front passenger

seat” later in this section.

OWhen your child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-

vent it from being thrown around in case

of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot. Check

the seating surface and buckles before

placing your child in the child restraint.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

ON REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR

CENTER POSITIONS

WARNING

OThe three-point seat belt in your vehicle

is equipped with an automatic locking

mode retractor which must be used

when installing a child restraint.

OFailure to use the automatic locking

mode will result in the child restraint not

being properly secured. The restraint

could tip over or otherwise be unsecured

and cause injury to the child in a sudden

stop or collision.

Front facing

When you install a child restraint in a rear

outboard or center seat, follow these

steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the

seat. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback. If

necessary, adjust or remove the head re-

straint to obtain the correct child restraint

fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” ear-

lier in this section. If the head restraint is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to install the head restraint when the

child restraint is removed. If the seating

position does not have an adjustable

head restraint and it is interfering with

the proper child restraint fit, try another

seating position or a different child re-

straint.

SSS0252A

Rear outboard seat

SSS0278

Rear center seat

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the

latch engage. Be sure to follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of

the belt is fully extended. At this time,

the belt retractor is in the automatic

locking mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts back to emergency locking

mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the

belt to remove any slack in the belt.

SSS0253G SSS0254H SSS0332C

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

5. Before placing the child in the child

restraint, use force to push the child

restraint from side to side, and tug it

forward to make sure that it is se-

curely held in place. It should not

move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it

does move more than 1 in (25 mm),

pull again on the shoulder belt to fur-

ther tighten the child restraint. If un-

able to properly secure the restraint,

move the restraint to another rear

seating position and try again, or try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-

matic locking mode by trying to pull

more belt out of the retractor. If you

cannot pull any more belt webbing out

of the retractor, the belt is in the auto-

matic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to

each use. If the belt is not locked, re-

peat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and

the seat belt is fully retracted, the auto-

matic locking mode (child restraint mode)

is canceled.

Rear facing

When you install a child restraint in a rear

outboard or center seat, follow these

steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the

seat. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0333C SSS0334

Rear outboard seat

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the

latch engage. Be sure to follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of

the belt is fully extended. At this time,

the belt retractor is in the automatic

locking mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts back to emergency locking

mode when the belt is fully retracted.

SSS0279A

Rear center seat

SSS0335 SSS0258A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up the

belt to remove any slack in the belt. 5. Before placing the child in the child

restraint, use force to push the child

restraint from side to side, and tug it

forward to make sure that it is se-

curely held in place. It should not

move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it

does move more than 1 in (25 mm),

pull again on the shoulder belt to fur-

ther tighten the child restraint. If un-

able to properly secure the restraint,

move the restraint to another rear

seating position and try again, or try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-

matic locking mode by trying to pull

more belt out of the retractor. If you

cannot pull any more belt webbing out

of the retractor, the belt is in the auto-

matic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to

each use. If the belt is not locked, re-

peat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and

the seat belt is fully retracted, the auto-

matic locking mode (child restraint mode)

is canceled.

SSS0259A SSS0260A

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM

1. LATCH lower anchor points (right)

2. LATCH lower anchor points (left)

3. LATCH label

The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) anchor points are located in the

seat cushions of the rear outboard

seating positions only. Do not attempt to

install a child restraint in the center posi-

tion using the LATCH anchors.

The LATCH system anchors are located at

the rear of the seat cushion near the seat-

back. A label is attached to the seatback to

help you locate the LATCH system anchors.

WARNING

OAttach LATCH system compatible child

restraints only at the locations shown. If

a child restraint is not secured properly,

your child could be seriously injured or

killed in an accident.

ODo not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using the

LATCH system anchors. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly.

OThe LATCH system anchors are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly fitted child restraints. Under

no circumstance are they to be used for

adult seat belts or harnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at

certain seating positions in your vehicle.

This system is known as the LATCH

system. This system may also be referred

to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible sys-

tem. With this system, you do not have to

use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child

restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with

special anchor points that are used with

LATCH system compatible child restraints.

Check your child restraint for a label stat-

ing that it is compatible with the LATCH

system. This information may also be in

the instructions provided by the child re-

straint manufacturer. If you have such a

child restraint, refer to the illustration for

the rear seating positions equipped with

LATCH system anchors which can be used

to secure the child restraint.

SSS0369

Sedan

SSS0370

Coupe

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Some child restraints may also require

the use of a top tether strap. See “Top

tether strap child restraint” later in this

section for installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

When you install a LATCH system compat-

ible child restraint to the lower anchor at-

tachments in the rear seat, follow these

steps.

WARNING

Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your

fingers into the lower anchor area and

feeling to make sure there are no obstruc-

tions over the LATCH system anchors, such

as seat belt webbing or seat cushion mate-

rial. The child restraint will not be secured

properly if the LATCH system anchors are ob-

structed.

1. To install the LATCH system compat-

ible child restraint, adjust the height

of the child restraint LATCH system an-

chor attachments to the anchor points

on the rear seat.

2. Insert the anchor attachments into the

anchor points. If the child restraint is

equipped with a top tether, see “Top

tether strap child restraint” later in

this section for installation instruc-

tions.

3. After attaching the child restraint and

before placing the child in it, use force

to push the child restraint from side to

side and tug it forward to make sure

that the child restraint is securely held

in place. It should not move more than

1 in (25 mm).

4. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to

each use.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

RESTRAINT

WARNING

OChild restraint anchor points are de-

signed to withstand only those loads im-

posed by correctly fitted child restraints.

Under no circumstance are they to be

used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

SSS0281A

Sedan

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OAfter removing a rear seat head restraint

for top tether installation, store it se-

curely to prevent it from causing injury to

passengers or damage to the vehicle in

case of sudden braking or an accident.

Always replace it and adjust properly

when top tether is no longer in use.

If your child restraint has a top tether

strap, it must be secured to the anchor

point provided behind its position.

First, adjust the seatback so that it is up-

right (if so equipped). Remove the anchor

cover from the anchor point as illustrated.

Keep the removed cover in a secure place

to prevent loss or damage. Then secure

the child restraint with the rear seat belt

or the LATCH system (outboard positions),

as applicable.

Remove the head restraint from the seat-

back, if equipped with an adjustable rear

head restraint. Store it in a secure place.

Position the top tether strap over the top

of the seatback and secure it to the tether

anchorage that provides the straightest

installation. Tighten the tether strap ac-

cording to the manufacturer’s instruction

to remove any slack.

For best child restraint fit, see the child

restraint installation instructions in this

section and the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear par-

cel shelf finisher.

If you have any questions when installing

a top strap child restraint on the rear seat,

consult an INFINITI dealer for details.

SSS0282

Coupe

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

ONever install a rear-facing child restraint

in the front passenger seat. Supple-

mental front air bags inflate with great

force. A rear-facing child restraint could

be struck by the supplemental front air

bag in a crash and could seriously injure

or kill your child.

OINFINITI recommends that child re-

straints be installed in the rear seat.

However, if you must install a front-

facing child restraint in the front passen-

ger seat, move the passenger seat to the

rearmost position. Also, be sure the front

passenger air bag status light is illumi-

nated to indicate the passenger air bag

is OFF. See “Front passenger air bag and

status light” later in this section for

details.

OA child restraint with a top tether strap

should not be used in the front pas-

senger seat.

OThe three-point seat belt in your vehicle

is equipped with an automatic locking

mode retractor which must be used

when installing a child restraint.

OFailure to use the retractor’s locking

mode will result in the child restraint not

being properly secured. The restraint

could tip over or otherwise be unsecured

and cause injury to the child in a sudden

stop or collision. Also, it can change the

operation of the front passenger air bag.

See “Front passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section.

SSS0300A

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Front facing

If you must install a child restraint in the

front seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the

front passenger seat. It should be

placed in a front-facing direction only.

Move the seat to the rearmost posi-

tion. Adjust the head restraint to its

highest position. Always follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions. Child restraints for infants must

be used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back. If necessary, adjust or remove

the head restraint to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. See “Head re-

straint adjustment” earlier in this sec-

tion.

If the head restraint is removed, store

it in a secure place. Be sure to install

the head restraint when the child re-

straint is removed.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint and it is

interfering with the proper child re-

straint fit, try another seating position

or a different child restraint. 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the

latch engage. Be sure to follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for belt routing.

SSS0301B SSS0360

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of

the belt is fully extended. At this time,

the belt retractor is in the automatic

locking mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts back to emergency locking

mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child

restraint, use force to push the child

restraint from side to side, and tug it

forward to make sure that it is se-

curely held in place. It should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it

does move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

pull again on the shoulder belt to fur-

ther tighten the child restraint. If un-

able to properly secure the restraint,

move the restraint to another rear

seating position and try again, or try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

SSS0361 SSS0424 SSS0302E

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-

matic locking mode by trying to pull

more belt out of the retractor. If you

cannot pull any more belt webbing out

of the retractor, the retractor is in the

automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to

each use. If the seat belt is not

locked, repeat steps 3 through 7.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition. The passenger air bag status

light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated, see “Front

passenger air bag and status light”

later in this section. Move the child re-

straint to another seating position.

Have the system checked by an IN-

FINITI dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and

the seat belt is fully retracted, the auto-

matic locking mode (child restraint mode)

will be canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING

OInfants and small children should always

be placed in an appropriate child re-

straint while riding in the vehicle. Failure

to use a child restraint or booster seat

can result in serious injury or death.

OInfants and small children should never

be carried on your lap. It is not possible

for even the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The child

could be crushed between the adult and

parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the

same seat belt around both your child

and yourself.

OINFINITI recommends that the booster

seat be installed in the rear seat. Accord-

ing to accident statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

OA booster seat must only be installed in

a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a three-

point type seat belt with a booster seat

can result in a serious injury in sudden

stop or collision.

OAn improperly installed booster seat

could lead to serious injury or death in

an accident.

BOOSTER SEATS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Do not use towels, books, pillows or other

items in place of a booster seat. Items such

as these may move during normal driving or

a collision and result in serious injury or

death. Booster seats are designed to be

used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats

are designed to properly route the lap and

shoulder portions of the seat belt over the

strongest portions of a child’s body to

provide the maximum protection during a

collision.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following

points in mind:

OChoose only a booster seat with a

label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard 213.

OCheck the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the ve-

hicle’s seat and seat belt system.

OMake sure the child’s head will be

properly supported by the booster

seat or vehicle seat. The seatback

must be at or above the center of the

child’s ears. For example, if a low back

booster seat

is chosen, the vehicle

seatback must be at or above the cen-

ter of the child’s ears. If the seatback

is lower than the center of the child’s

ears, a high back booster seat

should be used.

OIf the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the

booster seat and check the various

adjustments to be sure the booster

LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

seat is compatible with your child. Al-

ways follow all recommended proce-

dures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

WARNING

OImproper use of a booster seat can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury for

both the child and other occupants of

the vehicle.

OFollow all of the booster seat manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation and

use. When purchasing a booster seat, be

sure to select one which will fit your

child and vehicle. It may not be possible

to properly install some types of booster

seats in your vehicle.

OIf the booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a collision or a sudden stop

greatly increases.

OAdjustable seatbacks should be posi-

tioned to fit the booster seat, but as up-

right as possible.

OAfter placing the child in the booster

seat and fastening the seat belt, make

sure the shoulder portion of the belt is

away from the child’s face and neck and

the lap portion of the belt does not cross

the abdomen.

ODo not put the shoulder belt behind the

child or under the child’s arm. If you

must install a booster seat in the front

seat, see “Booster seat installation on

front passenger seat” later in this sec-

tion.

OWhen your booster seat is not in use,

keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-

vent it from being thrown around in case

of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot. Check

the seating surface and buckles before

placing your child in the booster seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON

REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR CENTER

POSITIONS

CAUTION

Do not use a lap/shoulder belt automatic

locking mode when using a booster seat

with the seat belts.

When you install a booster seat in the

rear seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direc-

tion. Always follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions.

2. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the

head restraint to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. See “Head restraint

adjustment” earlier in this section. If

the head restraint is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to install

the head restraint when the booster

seat is removed. If the seating posi-

tion does not have an adjustable head

restraint and it is interfering with the

proper booster seat fit, try another

seating position or a different booster

seat.

3. Position the lap portion of the seat

belt low and snug on the child’s hips.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for ad-

justing the belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for ad-

justing the belt routing.

5. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in the “Three-point type

seat belts with retractor” earlier in

this section.

LRS0452

Outboard position

LRS0451

Center position

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON

FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

INFINITI recommends that child restraints be

installed in the rear seat. However, if you

must install a booster seat in the front pas-

senger seat, move the passenger seat to the

rearmost position. Also be sure that the front

passenger air bag status light is illuminated

to indicate the passenger air bag is

OFF. See “Front passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section for details.

If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, follow these steps:

1. Move the seat to the rearmost posi-

tion.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direc-

tion. Always follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the

head restraint to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. See “Head restraint

adjustment” earlier in this section. If

the head restraint is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to install

the head restraint when the booster

seat is removed. If the seating posi-

tion does not have an adjustable head

restraint and it is interfering with the

proper booster seat fit, try another

seating position or a different booster

seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat

belt low and snug on the child’s hips.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for ad-

justing the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for ad-

justing the belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in the “Three-point type

seat belt with retractor” earlier in this

section.

7. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition. The passenger air bag status

light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated, see “Front

passenger air bag and status light”

later in this section. Move the booster

seat to another seating position. Have

the system checked by an INFINITI

dealer.

LRS0454

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

section contains important information

concerning the driver and passenger front

impact supplemental air bags (INFINITI ad-

vanced air bag system), front seat side-

impact supplemental air bags, curtain air

bags and front seat pre-tensioner seat

belts.

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

The INFINITI advanced air bag system can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and front pas-

senger in certain frontal collisions.

Supplemental side air bag system: This

system can help cushion the impact force

to the chest area of the driver and front

passenger in certain side impact colli-

sions. The front seat side-impact supple-

mental air bags are designed to inflate on

the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag

system: This system can help cushion the

impact force to the head of occupants in

front and rear outboard seating positions

in certain side impact collisions. The cur-

tain side-impact air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are

designed to supplement the crash protec-

tion provided by the driver and passenger

seat belts and are not a substitute for

them. Seat belts should always be cor-

rectly worn and the occupant seated a

suitable distance away from the steering

wheel, instrument panel and door fin-

ishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this

section for instructions and precautions

on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the systems are

operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

OThe supplemental front air bags ordi-

narily will not inflate in the event of a

side impact, rear impact, rollover, or

lower severity frontal collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various kinds

of accidents.

OThe front passenger air bag will not in-

flate if the passenger air bag status light

is lit or if the front passenger seat is un-

occupied. See 0Front passenger air bag

and status light0later in this section.

The seat belts and the supplemental front

air bags are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the seat.

Supplemental front air bags inflate with

great force. Even with the INFINITI ad-

vanced air bag system, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting sideways

or out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a crash.

You may also receive serious or fatal in-

juries from the supplemental front air

bag if you are up against it when it in-

flates. Always sit back against the seat

back and as far away as practical from

the steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always use the seat belts.

OThe driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

INFINITI advanced air bag system moni-

tors the severity of a collision and seat

belt usage then inflates the air bags.

Failure to properly wear seat belts can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

OThe front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) that turns the front

passenger air bag OFF under some con-

ditions. This sensor is only used in this

seat. Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

SSS0131B

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

See “Front Passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section.

OKeep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the

supplemental front air bag inflates.

SSS0132B

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

SSS0006

SSS0007

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

ONever let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of dan-

gerous riding positions are shown in the

previous illustrations.

OChildren may be severely injured or

killed when the supplemental front air

bags, side air bags or curtain side-

impact air bags inflate if they are not

properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-

dren should be properly restrained in the

rear seat, if possible.

OEven with the INFINITI advanced air bag

system, never install a rear-facing child

restraint in the front seat. An inflating

supplemental front air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill your child. For addi-

tional information, see “Child re-

straints” earlier in this section.

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag:

OThe supplemental side air bag and cur-

tain side-impact air bag ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a frontal im-

pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se-

verity side collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or se-

verity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

OThe seat belts, the supplemental side air

bags and curtain side-impact air bags

are most effective when you are sitting

well back and upright in the seat. The

side air bag and curtain side-impact air

bag inflate with great force. Do not allow

anyone to place their hand, leg or face

near the side air bag on the side of the

seatback of the front seat or near the

side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sit-

ting in the front seats or rear outboard

seats to extend their hand out of the

SSS0059A SSS0188A

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

window or lean against the door. Some

examples of dangerous riding positions

are shown in the previous illustrations.

OWhen sitting in the rear seat, do not hold

onto the seatback of the front seat. If the

side air bag inflates, you may be seri-

ously injured. Be especially careful with

children, who should always be properly

restrained.

ODo not use seat covers on the front seat-

backs. They may interfere with supple-

mental side air bag inflation.

SSS0140 SSS0159 SSS0162

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front air bag modules

3. Supplemental side air bag modules

4. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor)

5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bags

6. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bag modules

7. Diagnosis sensor unit

8. Seat belt pre-tensioner

9. Satellite sensors

10. Occupant classification system control

unit

INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG

SYSTEM (front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI

advanced air bag system for the driver

and front passenger seats. This system is

designed to meet certification require-

ments under U.S. regulations. It is also

permitted in Canada. However, all of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental air bag is located

in the center of the steering wheel. The

front passenger supplemental air bag is

mounted in the dashboard above the

glove box. The supplemental front air

bags are designed to inflate in higher se-

verity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not in-

flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

damage (or lack of it) is not always an in-

dication of proper supplemental air bag

operation.

SSS0416

Sedan

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The INFINITI advanced air bag system has

dual stage inflators. It also monitors infor-

mation from the crash zone sensor, the

diagnosis sensor unit, seat belt buckle

switches, occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) and passenger seat belt

tension sensor. Inflator operation is

based on the severity of a collision and

seat belt usage for the driver. For the

front passenger, it additionally monitors

the weight of an occupant or object on

the seat and seat belt tension. Based on

information from the sensors, only one

front air bag may inflate in a crash, de-

pending on the crash severity and

whether the front occupants are belted or

unbelted. Additionally, the front pas-

senger air bag may be automatically

turned OFF under some conditions, de-

pending on the pressure detected on the

passenger seat and how the seat belt is

used. If the front passenger air bag is

OFF, the passenger air bag status light

will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccu-

pied, the light will not be illuminated, but

the air bag will be off). See “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” later in

this section for further details. One front

air bag inflating does not indicate im-

proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, contact an INFINITI dealer. If

you are considering modification of your

vehicle due to a disability, you may also

contact an INFINITI dealer. Contact infor-

mation is contained in the front of this

Owner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag in-

flates, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by the release of smoke. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indi-

cate a fire. Care should be taken not to in-

SSS0418

Coupe

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

hale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with

the use of seat belts, help to cushion the

impact force on the face and chest of the

front occupants. They can help save lives

and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial

abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags

do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as

far as practical away from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. The supple-

mental front air bags inflate quickly in or-

der to help protect the front occupants.

Because of this, the force of the front air

bag inflating can increase the risk of in-

jury if the occupant is too close to, or is

against, the air bag module during infla-

tion.

The air bag will deflate quickly after a col-

lision.

The supplemental front air bags operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ON

or START position.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is op-

erational.

Front passenger air bag and

status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some condi-

tions. Read this section carefully to learn

how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat

belt and child restraints is necessary for

most effective protection. Failure to follow

SSS0367

Front passenger air bag status light

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

all instructions in this manual concerning

the use of seats, seat belts and child re-

straints can increase the risk or severity of

injury in an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger air bag status light

is located in the center display. The

light operates as follows:

Unoccupied passenger seat: The is

OFF and the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

OPassenger seat occupied by a small

adult, child or child restraint as out-

lined in this section: The illumi-

nates to indicate that the front pas-

senger air bag is OFF and will not in-

flate in a crash.

OOccupied passenger seat and the pas-

senger meets the conditions outlined

in this section: The light is OFF to

indicate that the front passenger air

bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S.

regulations. If the front passenger air bag

is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The

driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by re-

quiring the air bag to be automatically

turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to

meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classifi-

cation sensor (pressure sensor). It is in

the bottom of the front passenger seat

cushion and is designed to detect an oc-

cupant and objects on the seat by weight.

It works together with seat belt sensors

described later. For example, if a child is

in the front passenger seat, the advanced

air bag system is designed to turn the

passenger air bag OFF in accordance with

the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of

the type specified in the regulations is on

the seat, its weight and the child’s weight

can be detected and cause the air bag to

turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor

operation can vary depending on the front

passenger seat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are

designed to detect if the seat belt is

buckled and the amount of tension on the

seat belt, such as when it is in the auto-

matic locking mode (child restraint mode).

Based on the weight on the seat detected

by the occupant classification sensor and

the belt tension detected on the seat belt,

the INFINITI advanced air bag system de-

termines whether the front passenger air

bag should be automatically turned OFF

as required by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat

belt as outlined in this manual should not

cause the passenger air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. For small adults it

may be turned OFF, however, if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat

cushion (for example, by not sitting up-

right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or

by otherwise being out of position), this

could cause the sensor to turn the air bag

OFF. In addition, if the occupant improp-

erly uses the seat belt in the automatic

locking mode (child restraint mode), this

could cause the air bag to be turned OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing

the seat belt properly for the most effec-

tive protection by the seat belt and

supplemental air bag.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. INFINITI also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat.

If this is not possible, the occupant clas-

sification sensor and seat belt sensors

are designed to operate as described

above to turn the front passenger air bag

OFF for specified child restraints as re-

quired by the regulations. Failing to prop-

erly secure child restrains and to use the

automatic locking mode (child restraint

mode) may allow the restraint to tip or

move in an accident or sudden stop. This

can also result in the passenger air bag

inflating in a crash instead of being OFF.

See “Child restraints” earlier in this sec-

tion for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occu-

pied, the passenger air bag is designed

not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy

objects placed on the seat could result in

air bag inflation, because of the object’s

weight detected by the occupant classifi-

cation sensor. Other conditions could also

result in air bag inflation, such as if a

child is standing on the seat, or if two

children are on the seat, contrary to the

instructions in this manual. Always be

sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light,

you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turned OFF

with the seat occupied. The light will not

illuminate when the front passenger seat

is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

passenger air bag status light is illumi-

nated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small

adult, or is not sitting on the seat prop-

erly or is not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the

front seat, the passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-

pending on the size of the child and the

type of child restraint being used. If the

passenger air bag status light is not illu-

minated (indicating that the air bag might

inflate in a crash), it could be that the

child restraint or seat belt is not being

used properly. In rare cases, the pas-

senger air bag status light will not illumi-

nate even though the air bag is OFF.

If such situations happen, properly posi-

tion and restrain the occupant or child re-

straint. Otherwise reposition the occupant

or child restraint in a rear seat. If you

have any questions about whether your

passenger air bag is working as designed,

your INFINITI dealer can confirm that it is

working properly by using a special tool.

The INFINITI advanced air bag system and

passenger air bag status light will take a

few seconds to register a change in the

passenger seat status. For example, if a

large adult who is sitting in the front pas-

senger seat exits the vehicle, the passen-

ger air bag status light will change from

OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to

OFF. This is normal system operation and

does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front pas-

senger air bag system, the supplemental

air bag warning light , located in the

meter and gauges area will blink. Have

the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Other supplemental front air bag precau-

tions

WARNING

ODo not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instru-ment panel.

Also, do not place any objects between

any occupant and the steering wheel or

instrument panel. Such objects may be-

come dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the supplemental front air bag

inflates.

OImmediately after inflation, several front

air bag system components will be hot.

Do not touch them; you may severely

burn yourself.

ONo unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of the

supplemental air bag system. This is to

prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

ODo not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen-

sion system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

OTampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious per-

sonal injury. Tampering includes

changes to the steering wheel and the

instrument panel assembly by placing

material over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by install-

ing additional trim material around the

air bag system.

OModifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front passen-

ger seat or the seat cushion and seat-

back. Such objects may interfere with

the proper operation of the occupant

classification sensor (pressure sensor).

ONo unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of the

seat belt system. This may affect the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the seat belt system may re-

sult in serious personal injury.

OWork around and on the supplemental

front air bag system should be done by

an INFINITI dealer. Installation of elec-

trical equipment should also be done by

an INFINITI dealer. The yellow and or-

ange Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring and connectors should not

be modified or disconnected. Unautho-

rized electrical test equipment and prob-

ing devices should not be used on the air

bag system.

OA cracked windshield should be replaced

immediately by a qualified repair facility.

A cracked windshield could affect the

function of the supplemental air bag

system.

OThe SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy

identification.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

When selling your vehicle, we request

that you inform the buyer about the

supplemental front air bag system and

guide the buyer to the appropriate sec-

tions in this Owner’s Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL SIDE AIR BAG AND

CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT AIR BAG

SYSTEMS

The supplemental side air bags are lo-

cated in the outside of the seatback of

the front seats. The supplemental curtain

side-impact air bags are located in the

side roof rails. These systems are de-

signed to meet voluntary guidelines to

help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-

position occupants. However, all of the in-

formation, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The supplemental side air bags and cur-

tain side-impact air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity side collisions

on the side of the vehicle impacted, al-

though they may inflate if the forces in

another type of collision are similar to

those of a higher severity side impact.

They are designed to inflate on the side

where the vehicle is impacted. They may

not inflate in certain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not al-

ways an indication of proper supple-

mental side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag and

curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly

loud noise may be heard, followed by re-

lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should

be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause

irritation and choking. Those with a his-

tory of a breathing condition should get

fresh air promptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the

use of seat belts, help to cushion the im-

pact force on the chest of the front occu-

pants. Curtain side-impact air bags help to

cushion the impact force to the head of oc-

cupants in the front and rear outboard

seating positions. They can help save lives

and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating side air bag, or curtain side-

SSS0190

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

impact air bag may cause abrasions or

other injuries. Supplemental side air bags

and curtain side-impact air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and passenger seated up-

right as far as practical away from the

supplemental side air bag. Rear seat pas-

sengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side

roof rails. The side air bags and curtain

side-impact air bag inflate quickly in

order to help protect the front occupants.

Because of this, the force of the side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflat-

ing can increase the risk of injury if the

occupant is too close to, or is against,

these air bag modules during inflation.

The side air bag and curtain side-impact

air bag will deflate quickly after the colli-

sion is over.

The supplemental side air bags and cur-

tain side-impact air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

ODo not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher and

the front seat. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause injury if

the side air bag inflates.

ORight after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag system

components will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn yourself.

ONo unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of the

side air bag and curtain side-impact air

bag system. This is to prevent accidental

inflation of the side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag or damage to the

side air bag and curtain side-impact air

bag system.

ODo not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen-

sion system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag system.

OTampering with the supplemental

system may result in serious personal

injury. For example, do not change the

front seats by placing material near the

seatback or by installing additional trim

material, such as seat covers, around the

side air bag.

OWork around and on the side air bag and

curtain side-impact air bag system

should be done by an INFINITI dealer. In-

stallation of electrical equipment should

also be done by an INFINITI dealer. The

SRS wiring harnesses* should not be

modified or disconnected. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the side

air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy

identification.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

When selling your vehicle, we request

that you inform the buyer about the side

air bag and curtain side-impact air bag

system and guide the buyer to the appro-

priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system

(front seats)

WARNING

OThe pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be re-

used after activation. It must be replaced

together with the retractor and buckle as

a unit.

OIf the vehicle becomes involved in a fron-

tal collision but the pre-tensioner is not

activated, be sure to have the pre-

tensioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced by an INFINITI dealer.

ONo unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of the

pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to

prevent accidental activation of the pre-

tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-

tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering

with the pre-tensioner seat

belt system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

OWork around and on the pre-tensioner

system should be done by an INFINITI

dealer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by an INFINITI

dealer. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pre-tensioner seat

belt system.

OIf you need to dispose of the pre-

tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact

an INFINITI dealer. Correct pre-tensioner

disposal procedures are set forth in the

appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. In-

correct disposal procedures could cause

personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt sys-

tem activates in conjunction with the front

supplemental air bag systems. Working

with the seat belt retractor, it helps

tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-

comes involved in certain types of colli-

sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the

seat belt’s retractor. These seat belts are

used the same as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt acti-

vates, smoke is released and a loud noise

may be heard. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should

be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause

irritation and choking. Those with a his-

tory of a breathing condition should get

fresh air promptly.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-

tensioner seat belt system, the supple-

mental air bag warning light will not

come on, will flash intermittently or will

turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after

the ignition switch has been turned to the

ON or START position. In this case, the

pre-tensioner seat belt may not function

properly. They must be checked and re-

paired. Take your vehicle to an INFINITI

dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request

that you inform the buyer about the pre-

tensioner seat belt system and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

SRS air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on the

surface of the sun visors.

SRS side-impact air bag warning label

The warning label is located on the

side of the passenger’s side center

pillar.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front air bag and supplemental side air

bag systems are placed in the vehicle as

shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits of the supplemental

front air bag, supplemental side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag and pre-

tensioner seat belt systems. The circuits

monitored by the air bag warning light are

the diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sen-

sors, crash zone sensor, front air bag

modules, side air bag modules, curtain

side-impact air bag modules, pre-

tensioner seat belts and all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or

START position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates for about 7 sec-

onds and then turns off. This means the

system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur,

the supplemental front air bag, supple-

mental side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag, and pre-tensioner seat

belt systems need servicing:

OThe supplemental air bag warning

light remains on after approximately 7

seconds.

OThe supplemental air bag warning

light flashes intermittently.

OThe supplemental air bag warning

light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental

front air bags, supplemental side air

bags, curtain side-impact air bag or pre-

tensioner seat belt systems may not oper-

ate properly. They must be checked and

repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

INFINITI dealer.

SSS0330 SPA1097

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is

on, it could mean that the supplemental

front air bag, supplemental side air bag, cur-

tain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-

tensioner seat belt systems will not operate

in an accident. To help avoid injury to your-

self or others, have your vehicle checked by

an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supple-

mental side air bags, curtain side-impact

air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are

designed to activate on a one-time-only

basis. As a reminder, unless it is dam-

aged, the supplemental air bag warning

light remains illuminated after inflation

has occurred. Repair and replacement of

these systems should be done only by an

INFINITI dealer.

When maintenance work is required on

the vehicle, the supplemental front air

bags, side air bags, curtain side-impact

air bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and re-

lated parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The

ignition switch should always be in the

LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

OOnce a supplemental front air bag,

supplemental side air bag or curtain

side-impact air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again and

must be replaced. Additionally, if any of

the supplemental front air bags inflate,

the activated pre-tensioner seat belts

must also be replaced. The air bag

module and pre-tensioner seat belt

system should be replaced by an INFINITI

dealer. The air bag module and pre-

tensioner seat belt system cannot be re-

paired.

OThe supplemental front air bag, side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-

tems, and the pre-tensioner seat belt

system should be inspected by an

INFINITI dealer if there is any damage to

the front end or side portion of the

vehicle.

OIf you need to dispose of these supple-

mental systems or scrap the vehicle,

contact an INFINITI dealer.

Correct disposal procedures are set forth

in the appropriate INFINITI Service

Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel .............................................. 2-2

Meters and gauges........................................... 2-3

Speedometer and odometer ........................ 2-3

Tachometer ................................................. 2-4

Engine coolant temperature gauge.............. 2-4

Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5

Compass display .............................................. 2-6

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders......................................................... 2-9

Checking bulbs ........................................... 2-9

Warning lights............................................. 2-9

Indicator lights .......................................... 2-14

Audible reminders ..................................... 2-16

Security systems ............................................. 2-17

Vehicle security system.............................. 2-17

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .......... 2-18

Windshield wiper and washer switch .............. 2-19

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ............................................................ 2-20

Headlight and turn signal switch..................... 2-21

Xenon headlights....................................... 2-21

Headlight switch........................................ 2-21

Turn signal switch..................................... 2-24

Fog light switch......................................... 2-25

Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-25

Horn ............................................................... 2-26

Heated seats .................................................. 2-26

SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)............... 2-27

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch ....... 2-28

Clock .............................................................. 2-29

Adjusting the time..................................... 2-29

Power outlet ................................................... 2-29

Cigarette lighter and ashtray .......................... 2-30

Front ......................................................... 2-30

Rear .......................................................... 2-30

Storage ........................................................... 2-31

Door pocket .............................................. 2-31

Instrument pocket (except for navigation

system equipped models).......................... 2-31

Sunglasses holder .................................... 2-32

Cup holder ................................................ 2-32

Glove box .................................................. 2-35

Upper glove box (except for navigation

system equipped models).......................... 2-35

Console box .............................................. 2-36

Rear armrest pocket (Sedan) ..................... 2-37

Card holder (driver’s side)......................... 2-38

Coat hook (Coupe) .................................... 2-38

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

Stowing golf bags (Coupe) ........................ 2-39

Windows......................................................... 2-39

Power windows ......................................... 2-39

Automatic adjusting function (Coupe) ........ 2-41

Sunroof (if so equipped)................................. 2-42

Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-42

Interior lights ................................................. 2-44

Room light ................................................ 2-44

Map lights................................................. 2-44

Personal lights ......................................... 2-45

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)................. 2-46

Trunk light...................................................... 2-46

HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so

equipped)....................................................... 2-46

Programming HomeLink ........................... 2-47

Programming HomeLink for Canadian

customers ................................................. 2-48

Operating the HomeLink Universal

Transceiver................................................ 2-49

Programming trouble-diagnosis................. 2-49

Clearing the programmed information....... 2-49

Reprogramming a single HomeLink

button....................................................... 2-49

If your vehicle is stolen ............................. 2-50

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Headlight, fog light and turn signal

switch

2. Security indicator light

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

or steering wheel switch for

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System

(if so equipped)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn

5. Meters/gauges

6. Cruise control main/set switch

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

8. Center ventilator

9. Center display - Compass, Air condi-

tioner, Ambient temperature, Front

passenger air bag status light

10. Rear window and outside mirror de-

fogger switch

11. Heater/air conditioner control

12. Clock

13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

14. Passenger supplemental air bag

15. Upper glove box (except for Naviga-

tion system equipped models)

16. Side ventilator

17. Hood lock release handle

18. Trunk lid release switch

19. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch

20. Instrument brightness control

21. Outside mirror remote control switch

22. Fuse box

23. Electric steering column control (if so

equipped)

24. Manual steering column control

25. Ignition switch/steering lock

26. Snow mode switch (if so equipped)

27. Audio system

28. Ashtray/Cigarette lighter

29. Heated seat switch

30. Hazard warning flasher switch

31. Glove box

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

SSI0159

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Warning/Indicator lights

2. Tachometer

3. Automatic transmission position indi-

cator (AT models)/Manual transmis-

sion up-shift indicator (MT models)

4. Speedometer

5. Engine coolant temperature gauge

6. Trip odometer reset switch

7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip)/Up-shift in-

dicator setting (MT models)

8. Fuel gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer/

Up-shift indicator setting (MT

models)

The odometer

/twin trip odometer or

up-shift indicator setting (MT models)

are displayed when the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

SSI0075

SIC2559

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the trip odometer reset switch

changes the display as follows.

AT models:

TRIP A →TRIP B →TRIP A

MT models:

TRIP A →TRIP B →Up-shift indicator set-

ting mode →TRIP A

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section for the use of the

up-shift indicator.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the trip odometer reset switch for

more than 1 second resets the trip odom-

eter to zero.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev

the engine into the red zone

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the

engine in the red zone may cause serious en-

gine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature.

The engine coolant temperature is within

the normal range

when the gauge

needle points within the zone shown in

the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature will vary

with the outside air temperature and driv-

ing conditions.

SIC2560 SIC2561

2-4 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature near the hot (H) of the normal

range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If gauge is over the normal

range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely

possible. If the engine is overheated, contin-

ued operation of the vehicle may seriously

damage the engine. See “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section for immediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-

ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or

down hill.

The gauge needle is designed to move to

the E (Empty) position when the ignition

key is turned to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters the E (Empty) position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon

as it is convenient, preferably before the

gauge reaches the E (Empty) position.

There will be a small reserve of fuel in the

tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches

the E (Empty) position.

The indicates that the fuel-filler door

is located on the passenger’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

OIf the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

may come on. Refuel as soon as pos-

sible. After a few driving trips, the

lamp should turn off. If the lamp

remains on after a few driving trips, have

the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI

dealer.

OFor additional information, see “Mal-

function indicator lamp (MIL)” later in

this section.

SIC2562

Instruments and controls 2-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The compass is located in the center dis-

play.

Push COMP switch

to turn the display

on or off when the ignition switch is in

the ON position. The heading direction

will be displayed.

N: north

E: east

S: south

W: west

C: vehicle direction

The above example shows the display

changes from “East” to “East-southeast”.

If the compass unit does not receive any

correct signal for 10 minutes, the com-

pass will display the bar “-- -- --”. Have

the vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer.

SIC2563

COMPASS DISPLAY

2-6 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north

and geographical north is known as vari-

ance. In some areas, this difference can

sometimes be great enough to cause

false compass readings. Follow these in-

structions to set the variance for your par-

ticular location if this happens:

1. Establish your location on the zone

map

. Record your zone number.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition while pushing the COMP switch.

3. Continue to push the COMP switch for

more than 5 seconds until the current

zone entry number is displayed on the

compass display.

If any operations are not carried out

for more than 5 seconds, the display

shows direction as normal.

4. Push the COMP switch repeatedly until

the new zone entry number is dis-

played.

Once the desired zone number is dis-

played, stop pushing the COMP switch

and the display will show compass direc-

tion within a few seconds.

SIC2243A

Instruments and controls 2-7

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

If a magnet is located near the driver side

instrument panel (the sensor is located in-

side) or the vehicle is driven where the ter-

restrial magnetism is disturbed, the com-

pass display may not indicate the correct

direction.

OThe compass may not display correctly

at the following places:

— under a bridge

— among buildings

— on an iron bridge

— inside a tunnel

— above a subway

— on a railway crossing

— in an underground parking lot

— near a huge vehicle

— near a transformer substation

If you carry out correction procedure

at one of the above places, the proce-

dure may not be completed correctly.

OIf air conditioner fan speed is

maximum, the compass display may

shake. This is normal. Reduce the fan

speed to avoid shaking the display.

Correction functions of the

compass display

If the direction is not shown correctly,

carry out the correction procedure below.

1. Push the COMP switch for about 10

seconds. The direction bar starts

blinking.

2. Turn off electrical equipment such as

lights, hazard indicator, air condi-

tioner, etc. Then drive the vehicle

slowly (less than 3 MPH (5 km/h)) and

turn the vehicle one or more times in

an open and safe area. When the com-

pass displays the direction, the proce-

dure is completed.

2-8 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light (AWD

models) Low tire pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light

or Anti-lock brake warning light Low washer fluid warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic transmission check warning

light

P position selecting warning light (for

Intelligent Key system) High beam indicator light (Blue)

or Brake warning light Rear Active Steer (RAS) warning light (if

so equipped) Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Snow mode indicator light (if so

equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light Automatic transmission position indicator

light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Intelligent Key warning light (for Intelli-

gent Key system) Cruise main switch indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indica-

tor light

Low fuel warning light

CHECKING BULBS

Apply the parking brake and turn the igni-

tion key to ON without starting the en-

gine. The following lights will come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and

then go off:

, or , , , ,

, , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indi-

cate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit

in the electrical system. Have the system

repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

All-wheel drive (AWD)

warning light (AWD models)

The light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon

after the engine is started.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-9

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

If the AWD system malfunctions, or the di-

ameter of the front and the rear wheels

are different, the warning light will either

remain illuminated or blink. See “All-

wheel drive (AWD) warning light” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.

CAUTION

OIf the warning light comes on while

driving there may be a malfunction in the

AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed

and have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

ODo not drive on dry, hard surface roads in

the SNOW mode.

OIf the AWD warning light blinks on when

you are driving:

• blinks rapidly (about twice a second):

Pull off the road in a safe area, and

idle the engine. The driving mode will

change to 2WD to prevent the AWD

system from malfunctioning.

If the warning light turns off, you can

drive again.

• blinks slowly (about once every 2 sec-

onds):

Pull off the road in a safe area, and

idle the engine. Check that all tire

sizes are the same, tire pressure is

correct and tires are not worn.

If the warning light is still on after the above

operations, have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

or Anti-lock brake

warning light

When the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position, the anti-lock brake warning

light will illuminate and then turn off. This

indicates the anti-lock brake system (ABS)

is operational.

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the anti-lock

brake system is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI

dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

anti-lock function of the brake will cease

operation but the ordinary brakes will

continue to operate. See “Anti-lock brake

system (ABS)” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section for further details.

If the light comes on while you are driving,

contact an INFINITI dealer for repair.

Automatic transmission

check warning light

When the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position, the automatic transmission

check warning light comes on and then

turns off. This indicates that the auto-

matic transmission system is operational.

If the light comes on while the engine is

running or while driving, it may indicate

that the automatic transmission system is

not functioning properly. Have an INFINITI

dealer check and repair the transmission.

or Brake warning

light

The brake warning light indicates the

parking brake system operation, low

brake fluid level of the brake system and

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) malfunction.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON po-

sition, the light comes on when the park-

ing brake is applied.

2-10 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Low brake fluid warning light:

The light warns of a low brake fluid level.

If the light comes on while the engine is

running with the parking brake not ap-

plied, stop the vehicle and perform the

following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked by an

INFINITI dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning

indicator:

When the parking brake is released and

the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both

the brake warning light and the anti-lock

brake system warning light illuminate, it

may indicate the anti-lock brake system is

not functioning properly. Have the brake

system checked by an INFINITI dealer. See

“Anti-lock brake warning light” earlier in

this section.

WARNING

OYour brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you judge

it to be safe, drive carefully to the

nearest service station for repairs. Oth-

erwise, have your vehicle towed because

driving it could be dangerous.

OPressing the brake pedal with the engine

stopped and/or a low brake fluid level

may increase your stopping distance

and braking will require greater pedal ef-

fort as well as pedal travel.

OIf the brake fluid level is below the MINI-

MUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid res-

ervoir, do not drive until the brake

system has been checked by an INFINITI

dealer.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not functioning properly. Turn

the engine off and check the alternator

belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing

or if the light remains on, see an INFINITI

dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generator belt

is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the

doors are not closed securely while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pres-

sure. If the light flickers or comes on dur-

ing normal driving, pull off the road in a

safe area, stop the engine immediately

and call an INFINITI dealer or other autho-

rized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See

“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.

Instruments and controls 2-11

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pres-

sure warning light on could cause serious

damage to the engine almost immediately.

Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do

so.

Intelligent Key warning light

(for Intelligent Key system)

This light comes on in green when it is

possible to turn the ignition switch.

When the light comes on in red, it is not

possible to turn the switch.

OThe warning light blinks in red when

the Intelligent Key is outside the ve-

hicle with the ignition switch in the

ACC or ON position. Confirm the loca-

tion of the key as soon as possible

when the warning light blinks in red.

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you while driving the vehicle.

OThe warning light goes off about 10

seconds after the Intelligent Key is

brought inside the vehicle.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in the

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel

gauge reaches the E (Empty) position.

There will be a small reserve of fuel re-

maining in the fuel tank when the fuel

gauge needle reaches the E (Empty) posi-

tion.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-

sure monitoring system (TPMS) that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires except

the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is turned ON, this

light illuminates for about 1 second and

turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn the light

OFF.

For additional information, see “Tire pres-

sure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section and in the

“6. In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly,

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute when the

ignition switch is turned ON. The light will

remain on after the 1 minute. Have the

system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire pres-

sure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

OIf the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch turned ON, have the ve-

hicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as

soon as possible.

2-12 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OIf the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could result

in serious personal injury. Check the tire

pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low tire

pressure warning light OFF. If the light

still comes on while driving after ad-

justing the tire pressure, a tire may be

flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with

a spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated,

the TPMS will not function and the low tire

pressure warning light will flash. Contact

your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for

tire replacement and/or system resetting.

OReplacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

OThe TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

OIf the vehicle is being driven at speeds of

less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS

may not operate correctly.

OBe sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Low washer fluid warning

light

This light comes on when the washer tank

fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as

necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

P position selecting warning

light (for Intelligent Key

system)

The light blinks in red when the selector

lever is not in the P (Park) position and

you are outside the vehicle with the Intel-

ligent Key.

When the warning light blinks, move the

selector lever to P position and return the

ignition switch to the LOCK position.

Rear Active Steer (RAS)

warning light (if so

equipped)

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate that there is a

malfunction with the Rear Active Steer

(RAS) portion of the steering system. Have

the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

For further information about the RAS sys-

tem, see “Rear Active Steer (RAS) system”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

RAS function will cease but driving can be

continued.

If the light comes on while you are driving,

contact an INFINITI dealer for repair.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten

the driver’s seat belt. The light illuminates

whenever the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position, and will remain illumi-

nated until the driver’s seat belt is fas-

Instruments and controls 2-13

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

tened. At the same time, the chime will

sound for about 6 seconds unless the

driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illu-

minate if the front passenger’s seat belt

is not fastened when the front passen-

ger’s seat is occupied (if so equipped).

For 5 seconds after the ignition switch is

in the ON position, the system does not

activate the warning light for the front

passenger.

If the light blinks or illuminates even if

the driver’s and front passenger’s seat

belts are fastened, it may indicate that

the pre-crash seat belt system (if so

equipped) has a malfunction. Have an

INFINITI dealer check and repair the

system.

See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-

straint system” section for precautions on

seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag

warning light

After turning the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag

warning light will illuminate. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is op-

erational.

If any of the following conditions occur,

the supplemental front air bag, supple-

mental side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag systems, and pre-tensioner

seat belt need servicing and your vehicle

must be taken to your an INFINITI dealer.

OThe supplemental air bag warning

light remains on after approximately 7

seconds.

OThe supplemental air bag warning

light flashes intermittently.

OThe supplemental air bag warning

light does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supple-

mental Restraint System and/or the pre-

tensioner seat belt may not function prop-

erly. For additional information, see

“Supplemental restraint system” in the

“1. Safety — Seats, restraints and supple-

mental restraint system” section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is

on, it could mean that the supplemental

front air bag, supplemental side air bag, cur-

tain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-

tensioner seat belt systems will not operate

in an accident. To help avoid injury to your-

self or others, have your vehicle checked by

an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmission

position indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position, the indicator in the instru-

ment panel shows the automatic trans-

mission selector lever position. See “Driv-

ing with automatic transmission” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.

Cruise main switch

indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise con-

trol main switch is pushed. The light goes

out when the main switch is pushed

again. When the cruise main switch indi-

cator light comes on, the cruise control

system is operational.

2-14 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Cruise set switch indicator

light

The light comes on while the vehicle

speed is controlled by the cruise control

system. If the light blinks while the en-

gine is running, it may indicate the cruise

control system is not functioning prop-

erly. Have the system checked by an

INFINITI dealer.

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status light,

located on the center display, will be lit

and the passenger front air bag will be off

depending on how the front passenger

seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light

operation, see “INFINITI advanced air bag

system” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight

high beam is on and goes out when the

low beam is selected.

Malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

comes on steady or blinks while the en-

gine is running, it may indicate a poten-

tial emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator lamp may also

come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is

loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out

of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler

cap is installed and closed tightly, and

that the vehicle has at least three gallons

(14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lamp

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator lamp comes on steady for

20 seconds and then blinks for 10 sec-

onds when the engine is not running, it

indicates that the vehicle is not ready for

an emission control system inspection/

maintenance test. See “Readiness for

inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the

“9. Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator lamp will come

on in one of two ways:

OMalfunction indicator lamp on steady

— An emission control system mal-

function has been detected. Check the

fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is

loose or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The lamp should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the lamp

does not turn off after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by an

INFINITI dealer. You do not need to

have your vehicle towed to the re-

tailer.

OMalfunction indicator lamp blinking —

An engine misfire has been detected

which may damage the emission con-

trol system. To reduce or avoid emis-

sion control system damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45

MPH (72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or decel-

eration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator lamp may

stop blinking and come on steady.

Instruments and controls 2-15

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Have the vehicle inspected by an

INFINITI dealer. You do not need to

have your vehicle towed to the re-

tailer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without having

the emission control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could lead to poor drive-

ability, reduced fuel economy, and possible

damage to the emission control system.

Slip indicator light

The light will blink when the vehicle dy-

namic control (VDC) system is operating,

thus alerting the driver to the fact that the

road surface is slippery and the vehicle is

nearing its traction limits.

This light also comes on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the ON position.

The light will turn off if the VDC is opera-

tional.

Snow mode indicator light

(if so equipped)

When selecting SNOW mode while the en-

gine is running, this light will illuminate.

See “SNOW MODE SWITCH” in the “2. In-

struments and controls” section.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The light flashes when the turn signal

switch lever or hazard switch is turned

on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light

The light comes on when the vehicle dy-

namic control (VDC) off switch is pushed

to OFF. This indicates that the VDC system

is not operating.

This light also comes on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the ON position.

The light will turn off if the VDC system is

operational.

When the VDC off indicator light and slip

indicator light come on with the VDC sys-

tem turned on, this light alerts the driver

to the fact that the VDC system fail-safe

mode is operating and the system may

not be functioning properly. Have the sys-

tem checked by an INFINITI dealer. If a

malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC

system function will be canceled but the

vehicle is still driveable. For additional in-

formation, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

The chime will sound if the driver’s side

door is opened while the key is left in the

ignition switch (ignition switch is turned

off). Remove the key and take it with you

when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The chime will sound when the front door

is opened with the headlight switch on

unless the ignition switch is in the ON po-

sition.

Make sure to turn the light switch off

when you leave the vehicle.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, it will make a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-

tion whether or not the brake pedal is de-

pressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is

heard.

2-16 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your vehicle has two types of security

systems, as follows:

OVehicle Security System

OINFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by

the security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides vi-

sual and audible alarm signals if

someone opens the doors, hood, or trunk

lid when the system is armed. It is not,

however, a motion detection type system

that activates when a vehicle is moved or

when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-

nents in all situations. Always secure your

vehicle even if parking for a brief period.

Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and

always lock it when unattended. Be aware

of your surroundings, and park in secure,

well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-

tion, such as component locks, identifica-

tion markers, and tracking systems, are

available at auto supply stores and spe-

cialty shops. An INFINITI dealer may also

offer such equipment. Check with your in-

surance company to see if you may be eli-

gible for discounts for various theft pro-

tection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the win-

dows are open.

2. ORemove the key from the ignition

switch.

OTurn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position or remove the mechanical

key from the ignition switch (Intelli-

gent Key equipped model).

SIC2132 SIC2564

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Instruments and controls 2-17

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Close and lock all doors, hood and

trunk lid.

Lock all doors by pushing the LOCK

button on the keyfob, the Intelli-

gent Key or by pushing any front door

handle request switch or turning the

door key. When using the remote key-

less entry, the hazard indicators will

operate as shown in “Remote keyless

entry system” or “Intelligent Key

system” in the “3. Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section.

4. Confirm that the security indicator

light

comes on. The security indica-

tor light glows for about 30 seconds

and then blinks. The system is now

armed. If, during this 30-second time

period, the door is unlocked by the

key, the remote keyless entry or the

front door request switch, or the igni-

tion switch is turned to the ACC or ON

position, the system will not be

armed.

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will be

armed with all doors, hood and trunk lid

locked and ignition switch off. Turn the ig-

nition switch to the ACC position to turn off

the system.

Vehicle security system activation

The security system will give the following

alarm:

OThe headlights blink and the horn

sounds intermittently.

OThe alarm automatically turns off after

approximately 50 seconds. However,

the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is

tampered with again. The alarm can

be shut off by unlocking a door with

the key, by pushing any front door

handle request switch or by pushing

the UNLOCK button on the keyfob

or Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

OOpening the door without using the

key or keyfob or Intelligent Key.

OOpening the trunk lid without using

the keyfob or Intelligent Key.

OOpening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a

door with the key, by pushing any door

handle request switch or by pushing the

UNLOCK button on keyfob or Intelli-

gent Key. The alarm will not stop if the ig-

nition switch is turned to the ACC or ON

position.

If the system does not operate as de-

scribed above, have it checked by an

INFINITI dealer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using the regis-

tered key (for example, when interference

is caused by another registered key, an

automated toll road device or automated

payment device on the key ring), restart

the engine using the following proce-

dures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

2-18 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If this procedure allows the engine to

start, INFINITI recommends placing the

registered key on a separate key ring

to avoid interference from other de-

vices.

Statement related to section 15 of FCC

rules for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer

System (CONT ASSY-BCM, ANT ASSY-

IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-

SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID

THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE

EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

If INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, indicator light

will re-

main on while the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

gine will not start, see an INFINITI dealer

for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

service as soon as possible. Bring all reg-

istered keys that you have when visiting

an INFINITI dealer for service.

The windshield wiper and washer oper-

ates when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

Intermittent — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob

toward

(Slower) or

(Faster). Also,

the intermittent operation speed varies

in accordance with the vehicle speed.

(For example, when the vehicle speed

is high, the intermittent operation

speed will be faster.)

SIC2564 SIC2821

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-19

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Low — continuous low speed opera-

tion

High — continuous high speed opera-

tion

Push the lever up

to have one sweep

operation of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you

to operate

the washer. Then the wiper will also oper-

ate several times.

CAUTION

ODo not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

ODo not operate the washer if the reser-

voir tank is empty.

ODo not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

OPre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and ob-

scure your vision which may lead to an acci-

dent. Warm the windshield with the de-

froster before you wash the windshield.

To defog/defrost the rear window glass

and outside mirrors, start the engine and

push the switch

on. The indicator light

will come on. Push the switch again to

turn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approxi-

mately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear win-

dow, be careful not to scratch or damage the

rear window defroster.

SIC2565

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR

DEFROSTER SWITCH

2-20 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

OWhen xenon headlights are on, they pro-

duce a high voltage. To prevent an elec-

tric shock, never attempt to modify or

disassemble. Always have your xenon

headlights replaced at an INFINITI

dealer.

OXenon headlights provide considerably

more light than conventional headlights.

If they are not correctly aimed, they

might temporarily blind an oncoming

driver or the driver ahead of you and

cause a serious accident. If headlights

are not aimed correctly, immediately

take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer

and have the headlights adjusted

correctly.

When the xenon headlight is initially

turned on, its brightness or color varies

slightly. However, the color and bright-

ness will soon stabilize.

OThe life of xenon headlights will be

shortened by frequent on-off opera-

tion. It is generally desirable not to

turn off the headlights for short inter-

vals (for example, when the vehicle

stops at a traffic signal). Even when the

daytime running lights are active

(Canada only), the xenon headlights do

not turn on. This way the life of the

xenon headlights is not reduced.

OIf a xenon headlight bulb is close to

burning out, the brightness will drasti-

cally decrease, the light will start

blinking, or the color of the light will

become reddish. If one or more of the

above signs appear, contact an INFINITI

dealer.

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

Turn the switch to the position:

The front park, side marker, tail, li-

cense plate and instrument lights will

come on.

Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the

other lights remain on.

SIC2227

Type A

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-21

w06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine running

to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the head-

lights to be set so they turn on and off

automatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in

the AUTO

position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition.

3. The autolight system automatically

turns the headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF, or position.

The autolight system can turn on the

headlights automatically when it is dark,

turn off the headlights when it is light,

and keep the headlights on for up to 45

seconds after you turn the ignition switch

to the OFF position and open any door

then close all the doors.

If the ignition switch is turned off and one

of the doors is opened and this condition

is continued, the headlights remain on for

5 minutes.

SIC2228

Type B

SIC2229

Autolight system

2-22 Instruments and controls

w06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X

Be sure not to put anything on top of the

photo sensor

located on the top left-

hand side of the instrument panel. The

photo sensor controls the autolamp; if it is

covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is

dark and the headlights will illuminate.

Headlight beam select

To select the low beam, put the lever

in the neutral position as shown.

To select the high beam, push the

lever forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to select the

low beam.

Pulling the lever toward you will flash

the headlight high beam even when

the headlight switch is in the OFF posi-

tion.

Battery saver system

OWhen the headlight switch is in the

or position while the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position, the

lights (including the front fog light)

will automatically turn off 5 minutes

after the ignition switch has been

turned to the OFF position.

OWhen the headlight switch remains in

the or position after the

lights automatically turn off, the lights

will turn on for 5 minutes when the

headlight switch is turned to the OFF

position and then turned to the

or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature auto-

matically turns off the headlights after a pe-

riod of time, you should turn the headlight

switch to the OFF position when the engine

is not running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

SIC1230C SIC2230

Instruments and controls 2-23

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Daytime running light system

(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at

a reduced intensity when the engine is

started with the parking brake released.

The daytime running lights operate with

the headlight switch in the OFF position

or in the position. Turn the headlight

switch to the position for full illumi-

nation when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the daytime running

lights do not illuminate. The daytime run-

ning lights illuminate once the parking

brake is released. The daytime running

lights will remain on until the ignition

switch is turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is

active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on.

It is necessary at dusk to turn on your head-

lights. Failure to do so could cause an acci-

dent injuring yourself and others.

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control oper-

ates when the light switch is in the AUTO

(when lighting), or position.

Turn the control to the darkening direc-

tion

or the brightening direction

adjust the brightness of the instrument

panel (except power window switch

lights).

When the control is turned to the upper

end, the light intensity will be at

maximum. When the control is turned to

the lower end, the light will be turned off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-

cally.

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the point where lights

begin flashing.

SIC2566 SIC2231

2-24 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the head-

light switch to the position, then

turn the switch to the position. To

turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF

position.

The headlights must be on and the low

beams selected for the fog lights to oper-

ate. The fog lights automatically turn off

when the high beam headlights are se-

lected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-

gency conditions. All turn signal lights

will flash.

Some state or provincial laws may prohibit

the use of the hazard warning flasher

switch while driving.

WARNING

OIf stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

ODo not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless un-

usual circumstances force you to drive

so slowly that your vehicle might be-

come a hazard to other traffic.

OTurn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the igni-

tion switch either off or on.

SIC1836A SIC2574

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-25

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

To sound the horn, push on or near the

horn marks of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could

affect proper operation of the supplemental

front air bag system. Tampering with the

supplemental front air bag system may re-

sult in serious personal injury.

The front seats are warmed by built-in

heaters. The switches located on the cen-

ter console can be operated indepen-

dently (driver side seat

and front pas-

senger seat

) of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

For low heat, push the (Low)

side of the switch.

For high heat, push the

(High) side of the switch.

For no heat, the switch has a cen-

ter OFF position between low and

high.

The indicator light in the switch

will

illuminate when low or high is se-

lected.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-

stat, automatically turning the heater

on and off. The indicator light will re-

main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,

or before you leave the vehicle, be

sure to turn the switch to the off posi-

tion (center)

SIC1838 SIC2793

AT models

SIC2672

MT models

HORN HEATED SEATS

2-26 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

OThe battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

ODo not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the seat.

ODo not put anything on the seat which in-

sulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion,

seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may

become overheated.

ODo not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

OAny liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

OWhen cleaning the seat, never use gaso-

line, benzine, thinner, or any similar

materials.

OIf any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked

by an INFINITI dealer.

For driving or starting the vehicle on

snowy roads or slippery areas, push the

SNOW mode switch to the ON position

and then the indicator light in the switch

and the SNOW indicator light in the in-

strument panel will illuminate.

When the SNOW mode is activated, en-

gine output is controlled to reduce wheel

spin.

SIC2660

SNOW MODE SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-27

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

When turning the vehicle in SNOW mode on

paved roads, you may feel a braking effect.

This is a normal condition of the AWD model.

The vehicle should be driven with the Ve-

hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for

most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is de-

pressed to the floor. If maximum engine

power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system, push the VDC OFF switch (lo-

cated on the lower side of the instrument

panel). The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. See

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

SIC1881

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF

SWITCH

2-28 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

If the power supply is disconnected, the

clock will not indicate the correct time. Re-

adjust the time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

To move the time forward, push the

button

To move the time backward, push the

button

Push and hold each adjusting switch to

move the time forward or backward con-

tinuously.

The power outlet is for powering electrical

accessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION

The outlet and plug may be hot during or

immediately after use.

This power outlet is not designed for use

with a cigarette lighter unit.

Do not use with accessories that exceed a

12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not

use double adapters or more than one

electrical accessory.

OUse power outlets with the engine running

to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

OAvoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window de-

froster is on.

OBefore inserting or disconnecting a plug,

be sure the electrical accessory being used

is turned OFF.

OPush the plug in as far as it will go. If good

contact is not made, the plug may overheat

or the internal temperature fuse may open.

OWhen not in use, be sure to close the cap.

Do not allow water to contact the outlet.

SIC2568 SIC1840B

Automatic transmission model

SIC2673

Manual transmission models

CLOCK POWER OUTLET

Instruments and controls 2-29

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

FRONT

To open the ashtray, push

To take out the ashtray, pull out

The cigarette lighter operates when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON posi-

tion. To heat the cigarette lighter, push in

until it latches. When the lighter is

heated, it will spring out automatically.

Return the cigarette lighter to its original

position after use.

REAR

To open the ashtray, pull

To take out the ashtray, push down

and pull out.

WARNING

The cigarette lighter should not be used

while driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

The cigarette lighter socket is a power

source for the cigarette lighter element only.

The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a

power source for any other accessory is not

recommended. Do not use any other power

outlet for an accessory lighter.

SIC2569 SIC2570

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY

2-30 Instruments and controls

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

DOOR POCKETS

The door pockets are located on the driv-

er’s and front passenger’s doors. The

door pocket opening can be expanded to

make it easier to store and retrieve items.

Items stored in the door pocket should

not be larger than the door pocket

opening in its closed position. Make sure

the item does not hold the door pocket in

the open position.

CAUTION

Do not store items in the door pocket that are

larger then the opening in the closed posi-

tion. Do not force the door pocket closed if an

item holds the door pocket in the open posi-

tion. Doing so may damage the door pocket.

INSTRUMENT POCKET (except for

navigation system equipped models)

WARNING

OThe instrument pocket should not be

used while driving so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

OKeep the pocket lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

To open the instrument pocket, pull the

lid up.

To close, push the lid down.

SIC3171 SIC2815

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-31

w06.1.12/V35-D/V5.0 X

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

The sunglasses holder can be opened by

pushing the button

. To close, push the

holder up until the lock latches.

WARNING

OThe sunglasses holder should not be

used while driving so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

OKeep the sunglasses holder closed while

driving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

ODo not use for anything other than sun-

glasses.

ODo not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the sun-

glasses.

CUP HOLDER

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used while

driving so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

Front (Automatic transmission models):

To open the cup holder, push the lid

The flap will be folded down when insert-

ing a large container.

SIC1971 SIC2571

Automatic transmission models — Front

2-32 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull

it up as illustrated

Front (Manual transmission models):

To open the cup holder, slide the lid

Install the partition plate into the slit

To open the console boxes, push the

knob

and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until the lock

latches.

SIC2674

Manual transmission models — Front

SIC2675A

Manual transmission models — Console box

Instruments and controls 2-33

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

OAvoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

OUse only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an acci-

dent.

To open the cup holder, pull the lid.

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

OThe bottle holder/door pocket should

not be used while driving so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

ODo not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in the

vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

ODo not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.

SIC1846B

Rear

SIC2572

Coupe

2-34 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

GLOVE BOX

To open the glove box, pull the handle

To close, push the lid in until the lock

latches.

To lock

/unlock

the glove box, use

the master key.

The glove box light illuminates when the

glove box is opened with the headlight

switch on.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

UPPER GLOVE BOX (except for

navigation system equipped

models)

To open the upper glove box, push the

button

To close, push the lid down until the lock

latches.

The upper glove box light illuminates

when the upper glove box is opened with

the headlight switch on.

SIC2573 SIC1848A

Instruments and controls 2-35

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Keep upper glove box lid closed while

driving to help prevent injury in an accident

or a sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console boxes, push the

knob

and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until latched.

WARNING

The center console box should not be used

while driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

SIC2575

Automatic transmission model

SIC2676

Manual transmission model

2-36 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Coupe (manual transmission

model)

To remove the console lid:

1. Remove the original hinge mask. At-

tach a cloth when using a screwdriver.

2. Loosen 3 screws, and remove the lid.

3. Install the replacement hinge mask

and latch cover equipped with coupe

manual transmission model.

REAR ARMREST POCKET (Sedan)

The pocket can store a first aid kit, etc.

CAUTION

Do not use for heavy articles.

SIC2677

Coupe − Manual transmission model

SIC3013

Instruments and controls 2-37

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CARD HOLDER (driver’s side)

Type A

Insert a card in the holder.

WARNING

The card holder should not be used while

driving so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

Type B

Pull the sun visor down

and slide a

card

in the card holder.

COAT HOOK (Coupe)

To use the coat hook, push the hook

to release it.

CAUTION

Avoid hanging heavy goods on the hook.

SIC2332

Type A

SIC2154A

Type B

SIC2077A

2-38 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

STOWING GOLF BAGS (Coupe)

Normally, two standard golf bags can be

stowed in the trunk. Insert the top of the

golf bag into left side of the trunk room

then put the bag forward

. Insert

the top of the 2nd golf bag into right side

of the trunk room

and pull it in all the

way

In some cases, you may not be able to

stow two golf bags in your vehicle, de-

pending on their sizes or types.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

OMake sure that all passengers have their

hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is

in motion and before closing the win-

dows. Use the window lock switch to

prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

ODo not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls and become

trapped in a window. Unattended chil-

dren could become involved in serious

accidents.

The power windows operate when the ig-

nition key is in the ON position and for

about 45 seconds, after the ignition

switch is turned to the OFF position. If the

driver’s door or the front passenger’s

door is opened during this period of

about 45 seconds, power to the windows

is canceled.

Main power window switch

(driver’s side)

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Rear right passenger side window

5. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push down

or pull up

the switch and hold it.

The main switch (driver side switches) will

open or close all the windows.

SIC2209 SIC2576

Sedan — Main switch

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-39

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Locking passenger’s windows

When the lock button

is pushed in,

only the driver side window can be

opened or closed. Push it in again to can-

cel.

Passenger side power window

switch

The passenger side switch will open or

close only the corresponding window. To

open or close the window, hold the switch

down or up.

Automatic operation (For front

door windows or all door

windows, if so equipped)

To fully open or close the window, com-

pletely push down or pull up the switch

and release it; it need not be held. The

window will automatically open or close

all the way. To stop the window, just push

or lift the switch in the opposite direction.

Auto reverse function (Automatic

operation equipped model)

If the control unit detects something

SIC2577

Coupe — Main switch

SIC1892E

Front passenger side

SIC2578

Sedan — Type A

2-40 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

caught in a window as it moves up, the

window will be immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be acti-

vated when a window is closed by auto-

matic operation when the ignition switch

is in the ON position, or for about 45 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is turned to

the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately

before the closed position which cannot be

detected. Make sure that all passengers

have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-

fore closing the window.

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTING FUNCTION

(Coupe)

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from the

battery terminal, do not close either of the

front doors. The automatic window adjusting

function will not work, and the side roof

panel may be damaged.

The power window has an automatic ad-

justing function. When the door is being

opened, the window is automatically low-

ered slightly to avoid contact between the

window and the side roof panel. When the

door is closed, the window is automati-

cally raised slightly.

SIC2579

Sedan — Type B

SIC1979B

Coupe

Instruments and controls 2-41

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position.

The automatic sunroof is operational for

about 45 seconds, even if the ignition

switch is turned to the OFF position. If the

driver’s door or the front passenger’s

door is opened during this period of

about 45 seconds, power to the sunroof is

canceled.

Sliding the sunroof

To fully open or close the sunroof, push

the switch to the CLOSE

or OPEN

side for less than 1 second and release it;

it need not be held. The roof will auto-

matically open or close all the way. To

stop the roof, push the switch once more

while it is opening or closing.

To open or close the sunroof and stop on

the way, push the switch to the CLOSE

or OPEN

side for more than 1 second.

The roof will stop when releasing the

switch.

Auto reverse function (When

closing the sunroof)

If the control unit detects something

caught in the sunroof when it is closing,

the sunroof will immediately move back-

ward.

The auto reverse function can be acti-

vated when the sunroof is closed by auto-

matic operation when the ignition switch

is in the ON position or for about 45 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is turned to

the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the sunroof oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately

before the closed position which cannot be

detected. Make sure that all passengers

have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-

fore closing the sunroof.

Tilting the sunroof (Sedan)

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then

push and hold the UP

side of the

switch. To tilt down the sunroof, push and

hold the DOWN

side.

Tilting the sunroof (Coupe)

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then

push the UP

side of the switch and re-

lease it; it need not be held. To tilt down

the sunroof, push the DOWN

side.

Sun shade

Open or close the sun shade by sliding it

backward or forward.

The shade will open automatically when

the sunroof is opened. However, it must

be closed manually.

SIC1854B

SUNROOF (if so equipped)

2-42 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

OIn an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open sunroof. Al-

ways use seat belts and child restraints.

ODo not allow anyone to stand up or ex-

tend any portion of their body out of the

sunroof opening while the vehicle is in

motion or while the sunroof is closing.

CAUTION

ORemove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the sunroof before opening.

ODo not place any heavy object on the

sunroof or surrounding area.

If the sunroof does not close

If the sunroof does not close or open au-

tomatically, use the following procedure

to return sunroof operation to normal.

Sedan:

1. Push the switch to the CLOSE/UP side

to tilt up the sunroof. Release the

switch when the sunroof is in the fully

tilted up position.

2. Push and hold the switch to the

CLOSE/UP

side for approximately

10 seconds until the sunroof moves

automatically.

Continue to push and hold the switch

while the sunroof operates automati-

cally. Do not release the switch.

3. Release the switch when the sunroof

stops.

4. If the sunroof does not operate prop-

erly after step 4, repeat the procedure

starting with step 1.

Coupe:

1. Push the switch to the CLOSE/UP

side to tilt up the sunroof.

2. Release the switch when the sunroof

is in the fully tilted up position.

3. Push and hold the switch to the

CLOSE/UP

side for approximately

10 seconds until the sunroof automati-

cally closes.

4. Release the switch when the sunroof

stops.

5. Push and hold the switch to the

CLOSE/UP

side for approximately 4

seconds until the sunroof moves auto-

matically.

Continue to push and hold the switch

while the sunroof operates automati-

cally. Do not release the switch.

6. Release the switch when the sunroof

stops.

7. If the sunroof does not operate prop-

erly after step 6, repeat the procedure

starting with step 1.

Have an INFINITI dealer check and repair

the sunroof.

Instruments and controls 2-43

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

ROOM LIGHT

The room light has a two-position switch.

When the switch is in the door position

, the room light will illuminate when a

door is opened.

The light will stay on for about 30 sec-

onds when:

OThe doors are unlocked by the keyfob,

a key, power door lock switch or using

the Intelligent Key system while all

doors are closed.

OThe driver’s door is opened and then

closed while the key is removed from

the ignition switch or the ignition is

turned to the LOCK position (Intelli-

gent Key system).

OThe key is removed from the ignition

switch or the ignition is turned to the

LOCK position (Intelligent Key system)

while all doors are closed.

The light will turn off while the 30 second

timer is activated, when:

OThe driver’s door is locked either with

the keyfob, a key or the power door

lock switch.

OThe ignition switch is turned to the ON

position.

When the switch is in the OFF position

, the room light does not illuminate, re-

gardless of any condition.

MAP LIGHTS

When the switch is pushed in, the light

will turn on. When the switch is pushed

again, the light will turn off.

When the map light switch is in the ON po-

sition, it will automatically turn off 30 min-

utes after the ignition switch has been

turned to the OFF position. To turn on the

light again, turn the ignition switch to the

ON position.

The map, personal, and vanity mirror

lights will automatically turn off 30 min-

utes after the latest operation of the fol-

SIC2580 SIC2581

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-44 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

lowing with the ignition switch in the ACC

or OFF position:

OOpening or closing any door

OLocking or unlocking with the keyfob,

a key, the power door lock switch or

the ignition is turned to the LOCK po-

sition (Intelligent Key system)

OInserting or removing a key from the

ignition switch

These lights will turn on again when any

of the above operations is performed after

the lights have turned off automatically.

(The lights will turn off 30 minutes after

the latest operation of the above as well.)

CAUTION

OTurn off the map, personal and vanity

mirror lights when you leave the vehicle.

ODo not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS

Rear (Sedan)

: Left-hand side

: Right-hand side

The rear personal light has a three-

position switch.

When the switch is in the door position

, the light will illuminate when the rear

door is opened.

When the rear personal light switch is in

the ON position

, the rear personal

lights illuminate, regardless of any condi-

tion.

When the switch is in the OFF

position,

the rear personal lights do not illuminate,

regardless of any condition.

When the personal light switch is in the

ON position, it will automatically turn off

30 minutes after the ignition switch has

been turned to the OFF position. To turn on

the light again, turn the ignition switch to

the ON position.

SIC2582

Instruments and controls 2-45

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on

when the cover on the vanity mirror is

opened.

When the vanity mirror light stays on, it

will automatically turn off 30 minutes after

the ignition switch has been turned to the

OFF position. To turn on the light again,

turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is

opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the

light will go off.

When the trunk light stays on, it will auto-

matically turn off 30 minutes after the ig-

nition switch has been turned to the OFF

position. To turn on the light again, turn

the ignition switch to the ON position.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the

functions of up to three individual hand-

held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver:

OWill operate most Radio Frequency

(RF) devices such as garage doors,

gates, home and office lighting, entry

door locks and security systems.

OIs powered by your vehicle’s battery.

No separate batteries are required. If

the vehicle’s battery is discharged or

is disconnected, HomeLink will retain

all programming.

Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver

is programmed, retain the original trans-

mitter for future programming procedures

(i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of

the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink

Universal Transceiver buttons should be

erased for security purposes. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Programming

HomeLink ” later in this section.

SIC1859

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so equipped) TRUNK LIGHT HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if

so equipped)

2-46 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Do not use the HomeLink Universal

Transceiver with any garage door opener

that lacks safety stop and reverse features

as required by federal safety standards.

(These standards became effective for

opener models manufactured after April 1,

1982.) A garage door opener which cannot

detect an object in the path of a closing

garage door and then automatically stop

and reverse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features increases

the risk of serious injury or death.

ODuring the programming procedure, your

garage door or security gate will open or

close (if the transmitter is within range).

Makesurethatpeople or objects are clear

of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are

programming.

OYour vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

To program your HomeLink Transceiver

to operate a garage door, gate, or entry

door opener, home or office lighting, you

need to be at the same location as the

device. Note: Garage door openers (manu-

factured after 1996) have “rolling code

protection”. To program a garage door

opener equipped with “rolling code pro-

tection”; you will need to use a ladder to

get up to the garage door opener motor to

be able to access the “training” program

button.

1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer

HomeLink buttons (to clear the

memory) until the indicator light

blinks (after 20 seconds). Release both

buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held trans-

mitter1-3inches (26 - 76 mm) away

from the HomeLink surface.

SIC3012

Instruments and controls 2-47

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Using both hands, simultaneously

push and hold both the HomeLink

button you want to program and the

hand-held transmitter button.

DO NOT release the buttons until step

4 has been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indi-

cator light on the HomeLink flashes,

changing from a “slow blink” to a

“rapid blink”. When the indicator light

flashes rapidly, both buttons may be

released. The rapidly flashing light in-

dicates successful programming. To

activate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, push and hold the

programmed HomeLink button - re-

leasing when the device begins to ac-

tivate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink

blinks rapidly for two seconds and then

turns solid, HomeLink has picked up a

“rolling code” garage door opener sig-

nal. You will need to proceed with the

next steps to train the HomeLink to

complete the programming which may

require a ladder and another person for

convenience.

6. Push and release the training button

located on the garage door opener’s

motor to activate the “training mode”.

This button is usually located near the

antenna wire that hangs down from

the motor. If the wire originates from

under a light lens, you will need to re-

move the lens to access the training

button.

NOTE:

Once you have pushed and released the

training button on the garage door open-

er’s motor and the “training light” is lit,

you have 30 seconds in which to perform

step 7. Use the help of a second person for

convenience to assist when performing

this step.

7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pushing

and releasing the garage door opener

program button, firmly push and re-

lease the HomeLink button you’ve

just programmed. Push and release

the HomeLink button up to three

times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink button should now be

programmed.

To program the remaining HomeLink

buttons for additional door or gate

openers, follow steps 2-8 only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step one unless you want to

“clear” all previously programmed

HomeLink buttons.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink

buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site

at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required

hand-held transmitters to stop transmit-

ting after 2 seconds. To program your

hand-held transmitter to HomeLink , con-

SIC3011

2-48 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

tinue to push and hold the HomeLink

button (note steps 2 through 4 under

“Programming HomeLink ”) while you

push and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-

held transmitter every 2 seconds until the

indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating

successful programming).

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener, etc.,

it is advised to unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possible

damage to the garage door opener compo-

nents.

OPERATING THE HomeLink

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver

(once programmed) may now be used to

activate the garage door, etc. To operate,

simply push the appropriate programmed

HomeLink Universal Transceiver button.

The red indicator light will illuminate

while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING

TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink does not quickly learn

the hand-held transmitter information:

Oreplace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.

Oposition the hand-held transmitter

with its battery area facing away from

the HomeLink surface.

Opush and hold both the HomeLink

and hand-held transmitter buttons

without interruption.

Oposition the hand-held transmitter 2

to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from

the HomeLink surface. Hold the

transmitter in that position for up to 15

seconds. If HomeLink is not pro-

grammed within that time, try holding

the transmitter in another position -

keeping the indicator light in view at

all times.

If you continue to have programming diffi-

culties, please contact the INFINITI Con-

sumer Affairs Department. The phone

numbers are located in the Foreword of

this Owner’s Manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared,

however to clear all programming, push

and hold the two outside buttons and re-

lease when the indicator light begins to

flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink Universal

Transceiver button, complete the fol-

lowing.

1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink

button. Do not release the button until

step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to

flash slowly (after 20 seconds), posi-

tion the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5

inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the

HomeLink surface.

3. Push and hold the hand-held trans-

mitter button.

4. The HomeLink indicator light will

flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

When the indicator light begins to

flash rapidly, release both buttons.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver but-

ton has now been reprogrammed. The

new device can be activated by pushing

the HomeLink button that was just pro-

grammed. This procedure will not affect

any other programmed HomeLink but-

tons.

Instruments and controls 2-49

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change

the codes of any non-rolling code device

that has been programmed into HomeLink .

Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device

or call the manufacturer or dealer of those

devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new transmit-

ter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part

15. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference and (2) This de-

vice must accept any interference that may

be received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

2-50 Instruments and controls

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ................................................................. 3-2

Infiniti vehicle immobilizer system keys ...... 3-2

Doors ............................................................... 3-3

Locking with key ......................................... 3-3

Locking with inside lock knob..................... 3-4

Locking with power door lock switch........... 3-4

Child safety rear door lock (Sedan) ............. 3-5

Remote keyless entry system (models without

Intelligent Key system) ..................................... 3-5

How to use remote keyless entry system .... 3-6

Intelligent Key system (if so equipped)............. 3-9

Door locks/unlocks precaution .................. 3-11

Intelligent Key operation ............................ 3-11

Opening and closing windows ................... 3-14

Operating the engine................................. 3-14

Intelligent Key operating range ................. 3-16

Warning signals ......................................... 3-17

Trouble-shooting guide .............................. 3-19

Operation with intelligent remote keyless

entry system ............................................. 3-20

Operation with the mechanical key and

valet key ................................................... 3-23

Hood .............................................................. 3-24

Trunk lid ......................................................... 3-25

Opener operation ...................................... 3-25

Interior trunk lid release............................ 3-27

Secondary trunk lid release....................... 3-27

Fuel-filler door................................................ 3-28

Opening the fuel-filler door ....................... 3-28

Fuel-filler cap ............................................ 3-29

Steering wheel ............................................... 3-30

Manual operation...................................... 3-30

Electric operation (if so equipped) ............. 3-31

Sun visors ...................................................... 3-32

Mirrors............................................................ 3-32

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror (if so

equipped).................................................. 3-32

Outside mirrors ......................................... 3-33

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .... 3-34

Automatic drive positioner operation......... 3-34

Entry/exit function (if so equipped) ........... 3-34

Memory storage function........................... 3-35

System operation ...................................... 3-36

Cancel switch (if so equipped)................... 3-37

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Master key 2 sets (With built-in tran-

sponder chip), INFINITI MARK: silver

2. Valet key (With built-in transponder

chip), INFINITI MARK: Black

3. Wallet key and Key case (Card type)

4. Key number plate

1. Intelligent Key 2 sets*

2. Mechanical key (metal key)* 2 sets

3. Valet key (metal key)

4. Wallet key and key case (card type)

(metal key)

5. Key number plate

*: Refer to “Intelligent Key system” later

in this section.

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it

in a safe place (such as your wallet), not

in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see

an INFINITI dealer for duplicates by using

the key number.

A key number is necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to dupli-

cate from. If you still have a key, an

INFINITI dealer can duplicate it.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the

master or valet keys which are registered

to the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

components in your vehicle. These keys

have a transponder chip in the key head.

The master key can be used for all the

locks.

The valet key cannot be used for glove

box lock and the trunk access window lid

lock.

To protect belongings when you leave a

key with someone, give them the valet

key only.

SPA2105

Model without Intelligent Key system

SPA2179

Model with Intelligent Key system

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is

not necessary when you need extra

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys.

An INFINITI dealer can duplicate it. As

many as 5 INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer

System keys can be used with one ve-

hicle. You should bring all registered keys

that you have to an INFINITI dealer for reg-

istration. This is because the registration

process will erase the memory of all key

codes previously registered into the

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System. After

the registration process, these compo-

nents will only recognize keys coded into

the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

during registration. Any key that is not

given to your dealer at the time of regis-

tration will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,

which contains an electrical transponder,

to come into contact with salt water. This

could affect system function.

WARNING

OAlways have the doors locked while driv-

ing. Along with the use of seat belts, this

provides greater safety in the event of an

accident by helping to prevent persons

from being thrown from the vehicle. This

also helps keep children and others from

unintentionally opening the doors, and

will help keep out intruders.

OBefore opening any door, always look for

and avoid oncoming traffic.

ODo not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

Power

The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors, trunk lid and the

fuel-filler door.

OTurning the door key cylinder to the

front of the vehicle

will lock all

doors, trunk lid and fuel-filler door.

OTurning the door key cylinder to the

rear of the vehicle

once will unlock

the driver’s door.

Turning the door key cylinder to the

rear of the vehicle again within 5 sec-

SPA1884

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

onds will unlock all doors, the trunk

lid and the fuel-filler door.

Opening and closing windows

To open the door windows, turn the door

key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle and

hold the key for about 1 second.

To stop opening, return the door key cyl-

inder to the neutral position by turning

the key.

To close the door windows, turn the door

key cylinder to the front of the vehicle

and hold the key for about 1 second.

To stop closing, return the door key cylin-

der to the neutral position by turning the

key.

In the event of an obstruction, such as a

hand, in the way of door windows, the

auto reverse function will activate.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To individually lock the doors, push the

inside lock knob down to the LOCK posi-

tion

, then close the door.

When locking the door using inside lock

knob, be sure not to leave the key inside of

the vehicle.

To unlock, pull the inside lock knob up to

the UNLOCK position

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

All doors will be locked when the power

door lock switch is pushed to the LOCK

position

with the driver’s or front pas-

senger’s door open. Then close the door

and all doors will be locked.

When locking the door this way, be certain

not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock, push the power door lock

switch to the UNLOCK position

SPA1814 SPA1505F

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver

or front passenger) is moved to the LOCK

position with the key in the ignition and

any door open, all doors will lock and un-

lock automatically. This helps to prevent

the keys from being accidentally locked

inside the vehicle.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

(Sedan)

Child safety rear door lock helps prevent

rear doors from being opened acciden-

tally, especially when small children are

in the vehicle.

When the levers are in the LOCK

posi-

tion, the rear doors can be opened by the

outside door handles only.

To disengage, move the levers to the un-

lock position

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,

trunk lid and fuel-filler door and activate

the panic alarm by using the keyfob from

outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

key is not left in the vehicle.

The keyfob can operate at a maximum

distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m)

away from the vehicle. (The operating dis-

tance depends upon the conditions

around the vehicle.)

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with

one vehicle. For information about pur-

chase and use of additional keyfobs, con-

tact an INFINITI dealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

Othe battery is completely discharged,

Othe distance between the vehicle and

the keyfob is more than 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when the

key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

The following conditions or occurrences may

damage the keyfob.

SPA0086A

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (models

without Intelligent Key system)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

ODo not allow the keyfob to become wet.

ODo not drop the keyfob.

ODo not strike the keyfob sharply against

another object.

ODo not place the keyfob for an extended

period in an area where temperatures ex-

ceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, INFINITI recom-

mends erasing the ID code of that keyfob.

This will prevent the keyfob from unautho-

rized use to unlock the vehicle. For informa-

tion regarding the erasing procedure, please

contact an INFINITI dealer.

For information regarding the replacement

of a battery, see “Keyfob battery replace-

ment” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

LOCK button

UNLOCK button

TRUNK button

PANIC button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Remove the ignition key.*1,*2

2. Close all doors.*3

3. Push the LOCK button on the key-

fob.

4. All doors, the trunk lid and the fuel-

filler door will lock.

All doors will lock when the LOCK

button on the keyfob is pushed even

though a door remains open and/or the ig-

nition switch is in any position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and

the horn chirps once.

OWhen the LOCK button is pushed

with all doors locked, the hazard indi-

cator flashes twice and the horn

chirps once as a reminder that the

doors are already locked.

*1: Doors lock with the keyfob while a

key is in the ignition switch. However,

the panic alarm will not activate when

the key is in the ignition switch.

*2: Doors lock with the keyfob while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

However, the switching indicators will

not function.

*3: Doors lock with the keyfob while any

door is open. However, the switching

indicators will not function.

SPA1918

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler

door

1. Push the UNLOCK button on the

keyfob once.

OThe driver’s door and fuel-filler door

unlock

OThe hazard indicator flashes once if all

doors are completely closed with the

ignition switch in any position except

in the ON position.

OThe interior light timer activates and

the interior light comes on for 30 sec-

onds when the interior light switch is

at the DOOR position with the ignition

switch in any position except in the

ON position.

2. Push the UNLOCK button on the

keyfob again within 5 seconds.

OAll doors and trunk lid unlock

OThe hazard indicator flashes once if all

doors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute of pushing the

UNLOCK button.

Oopening any door.

Oopening trunk lid.

Oturning the ignition switch to the ON

position

The interior light can be turned off

without waiting for 30 seconds by turning

the ignition switch to the ON position or

by locking the doors with the keyfob.

Opening the windows

Push the UNLOCK button on the

keyfob.

The driver’s door and fuel-filler door will

unlock.

Continue to push the UNLOCK button

for more than 3 seconds. The door win-

dows will start to lower.

Continue to push the UNLOCK button

until windows are fully open.

To stop the windows lowering operation,

release the UNLOCK button.

To start the windows lowering operation,

push the UNLOCK button again for

more than 3 seconds.

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button on the

keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds

when the ignition switch is in any po-

sition except the ON position.

2. The trunk lid opens.

The trunk lid cannot be opened by operat-

ing the keyfob when the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel

threatened, you may activate the alarm to

call attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC button on the

keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds

with the key removed from the ignition

switch.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-

lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

OIt has run for 25 seconds, or

OThe LOCK button or the UNLOCK

button on keyfob is pushed, or

OThe TRUNK button or the PANIC

button on the keyfob is pushed

for longer than 0.5 second.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

The factory setting of the remote keyless

entry system is in hazard indicator and

horn mode.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when

the LOCK button is pushed, the

hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indica-

tor flashes once.

If horn chirps are not necessary, the

system can be switched to hazard indica-

tor mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indica-

tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, neither the hazard

indicator nor the horn operates.

Switching procedure:

Push the LOCK button and UNLOCK

button on the keyfob simultaneously

for more than 2 seconds to switch from

one mode to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard

indicator only mode, the hazard indicator

flashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard

indicator and horn mode, the hazard indi-

cator flashes once and the horn chirps

once.

SPA2180

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The Intelligent Key uses coded radio sig-

nals to communicate with the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key is near the ve-

hicle, such as in your pocket or purse, it

allows the vehicle to be locked, unlocked,

or started without inserting the ignition

key. It is also possible to use the remote

control entry function.

CAUTION

OBe sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you.

ODo not leave the vehicle with the Intelli-

gent Key inside.

OThe Intelligent Key may not function

correctly depending on the environ-

ment or operating conditions. It could

also malfunction if you do not use it

correctly.

OThe Intelligent Key transmits faint

radio waves.

In the following situations, the Intelli-

gent Key and remote control entry func-

tions may not operate correctly, and

you may have to use the metal key (me-

chanical key, valet key or wallet key):

— when there are strong signals

coming from a television tower,

power station or broadcasting sta-

tion.

— when you have wireless equipment

or a cellular phone with you.

— when the Intelligent Key is in con-

tact with or covered by a metallic

material.

— when radio wave-type remote con-

trol entry is used nearby.

— when the Intelligent Key is placed

near an electric appliance such as a

personal computer.

OThe Intelligent Key continually con-

sumes battery power as the key re-

ceives a signal to communicate with

the vehicle. Battery life is about 2

years, although it varies depending on

the operating conditions. When the

battery of the Intelligent Key is low, the

green blinking key warning light goes

out about 30 seconds after the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position. If

the battery runs down, replace it with a

new one.

OIf the Intelligent Key receives strong

signal over an extended period of time,

the battery could quickly run down. Do

not place the Intelligent Key near an

electric appliance such as a television

set or personal computer.

OBecause the ignition switch is elec-

tronically controlled, if the battery is

completely discharged when the igni-

tion switch is in the LOCK position, the

steering lock cannot be released and

the ignition switch cannot be turned

(including the mechanical key). Be

careful not to completely discharge the

battery.

OIn case the battery is completely dis-

charged, make sure to recharge the

battery immediately.

For information regarding the replacement

of a battery, see “Keyfob battery replace-

ment” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Intelligent Key 2 sets

2. Mechanical key (metal key)* 2 sets

3. Valet key (metal key)*

4. Wallet key and key case (card type)

(metal key)

5. Key number plate

*: Refer to “INFINITI vehicle immobilizer

system keys” earlier in this section.

WARNING

OThe Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves that can adversely affect medical

electric equipment.

OIf you have a pacemaker, you should

contact the medical equipment manufac-

turer to ask if it will be affected by the In-

telligent Key signal.

The valet key cannot be used for the glove

box lock and the trunk access window lid

lock.

To protect belongings when you leave a

key with someone, give them the valet

key only.

Record the key number on the key

number plate/metal tag and keep it in a

safe place (such as your wallet), NOT IN

THE VEHICLE. A key number plate is sup-

plied with your key. Keep the plate in a

safe place. INFINITI does not record key

numbers so it is very important to keep

track of your key number plate.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used

with one vehicle. For information concern-

ing the purchase and use of additional re-

mote controllers, contact an INFINITI

dealer.

It is possible that the Intelligent Key func-

tions can become cancelled. Please con-

tact an INFINITI dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you

when driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci-

sion device with a built-in transmitter. To

avoid damaging it, please note the fol-

lowing.

OThe Intelligent Key is water resistant,

wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.

If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immedi-

ately wipe until it is completely dry.

ODo not bend, drop or strike it against an-

other object.

ODo not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in a place where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

SPA2179

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

ODo not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

ODo not use a magnet key holder.

ODo not place the Intelligent Key near an

electric appliance such as a television

set or personal computer.

ODo not place the Intelligent Key in a stor-

age area (for example, a door pocket or

glove box). It could be damaged or acti-

vated unexpectedly.

ODo not allow the Intelligent Key to come

into contact with water or salt water, and

do not wash it in a washing machine.

This could affect the system function.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI

recommends erasing the ID code of that In-

telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelli-

gent Key from unauthorized use to unlock

the vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, please contact an

INFINITI dealer.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

OAfter locking with the door handle re-

quest switch, make sure the doors are

securely locked.

OTo prevent the Intelligent Key from be-

ing left inside the vehicle, make sure

you carry the key with you and then

lock the doors.

OTo prevent the Intelligent Key from be-

ing left inside the trunk, make sure

you carry the key with you and then

close the trunk.

OYou can lock or unlock the doors using

only the door handle, which detects

the Intelligent Key.

OWhen you try to unlock the door while

pulling the door handle, the door may

not unlock. In this case, release the

door handle and the door will unlock.

Pull the door handle again and the

door will open.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the key out from your pocket or

purse.

SPA1887

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

When you carry the Intelligent Key with

you, you can lock or unlock all doors by

pushing the door handle request switch

within the range of operation.

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the ignition key if

any metal key is in the ignition

switch.*1, *2

2. Close all the doors.*3

3. Push any door handle request switch

while carrying the Intelligent Key with

you.*4

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will

lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and

outside buzzer sounds twice.

*1: Doors lock with the Intelligent Key

while a mechanical key or valet key is

in the ignition switch.

*2: Doors lock with the Intelligent Key

while the ignition switch is not in the

LOCK position.

*3: Doors do not lock by pushing the

door handle request switch or the

LOCK button on the Intelligent

Key while any door is open. Outside

buzzer sounds to warn you. However,

doors lock with the metal key even if

any door is open.

*4: Doors do not lock with door handle

request switch with the Intelligent

Key inside the vehicle and outside

buzzer sounds to warn you.

However, when an Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle, doors can be

locked with another Intelligent Key.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler

door

1. Push the door handle request switch

once.

Driver’s side:

OThe driver door and fuel-filler door

unlock.

Front passenger side:

OOnly corresponding door unlocks.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and

outside buzzer sounds once if all

doors are completely closed with the

ignition switch in any position except

the ON position.

3. Push the door handle request switch

again within 5 seconds.

SPA1888

Sedan

SPA2181

Coupe

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OAll doors and the fuel-filler door un-

lock.

OThe hazard indicator flashes once and

outside buzzer sounds once if all

doors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically

after pushing the door handle request

switch unless one of the following opera-

tions is performed within 1 minute.

Oany door is opened

Othe ignition switch is pushed

Othe mechanical key or the valet key is

inserted into the ignition switch

The interior light, ceiling light (if so

equipped) and step light can be turned off

without waiting for 30 seconds by turning

the ignition switch to the ON position or

by locking the doors.

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the trunk open request switch

2. The trunk will be unlatched and buzzer

sounds four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection:

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout

protection is equipped with the Intelligent

Key system.

SPA1889

SPA1890

Sedan

SPA2182

Coupe

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

When the trunk lid is closed with the In-

telligent Key inside the trunk, the outside

buzzer will sound and the trunk will open.

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS

OTo open the windows, push the UN-

LOCK button on the Intelligent

Key for about 3 seconds or turn the

door key cylinder with the metal key

to the rear of the vehicle for about 2

seconds after the door is unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK

button or turn the key to the neu-

tral position.

OTo close the windows, turn the door

key cylinder to the front of the vehicle

for about 2 seconds after the door is

locked.

To stop closing, turn the key to the

neutral position.

The door windows will open or close

while turning the metal key. See “Doors”

earlier in this section.

OPERATING THE ENGINE

Ignition switch positions

Push in the ignition switch in the

range when you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in

the

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when

it is pushed in, and turned to the ACC po-

sition

while carrying the Intelligent

Key.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries such as the radio, when the engine is

not running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system

and electrical accessories.

START

This position starts the engine. As soon

as the engine has started, release the

switch immediately. It will automatically

return to the ON position.

For important safety information, see “Ig-

nition switch” in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section.

The ignition switch cannot be turned back

to the LOCK position unless the shift lever

is in P position. (It can be turned to only

SPA1628

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition

switch in ACC or ON position when the en-

gine is not running for an extended period.

This can discharge the battery.

Starting the engine

When driving the vehicle, be sure to carry

the Intelligent Key with you.

1. Securely depress the brake pedal.

2. Slowly push the ignition switch in.

When the Intelligent Key warning light

in the instrument panel comes on

in green, the ignition switch can be

turned.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the START

position and the engine will be

started.

4. When the engine starts, release the ig-

nition switch.

WARNING

Do not start the engine from outside the ve-

hicle through the window. Doing so could

lead to an accident and injury. Be sure to sit

in the driver’s seat to use the key.

For important safety information, see

“Starting the engine” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.

OWhen the ignition switch is pushed

under the following conditions, the In-

telligent Key warning light in the in-

strument panel comes on in red. It is

not possible to turn the ignition switch

when:

— you do not have the Intelligent Key

with you

— the Intelligent Key battery has run

down

— you have a Intelligent Key for an-

other vehicle with you

SPA1891

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OSlowly turn the ignition switch after

the Intelligent Key warning light

comes on in green. If it is turned

quickly, it may stick and be difficult to

turn.

OThe engine may not start if the Intelli-

gent Key is placed:

— inside the glove box or the door

pocket

— on the instrument panel

— in the corner of interior compart-

ment.

OIf it is difficult to turn the ignition

switch, perform the following:

— Push the ignition switch and turn it

to the left and then to the right.

— Turn the ignition switch while

gently turning the steering wheel to

the left or right.

Stopping the engine

1. Shift the selector lever to the P posi-

tion.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC po-

sition.

WARNING

When you leave the vehicle, be sure to ob-

serve the following:

OShift the selector lever to P. (In other po-

sitions, the ignition switch will not re-

turn to LOCK.)

OSecurely return the ignition switch to

LOCK.

OSet the parking brake. Failure to do so

could result in unexpected vehicle move-

ment and could lead to severe injury.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING

RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can be used

only when you carry the key with you and

operate as specified in the operating

range inside or outside the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key battery runs

down or where there are strong radio

waves or noise, the operating range may

be narrower or the key may be inopera-

tive.

Operating range of the door or

trunk lock/unlock function

The outside sensors are in the front out-

side door handles and the trunk.

SPA1900

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The operating range of the door or trunk

lock/unlock function by pushing the door

handle request switch or trunk open re-

quest switch is shown in the illustration.

31.5 in (80 cm) from the door handle

request switch

31.5 in (80 cm) from the trunk open re-

quest switch

OIf you are too close to the outside

door handles or rear bumper, the In-

telligent Key may not operate.

OIf the Intelligent Key is in the oper-

ating range, it is possible for anyone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key

to lock/unlock the doors by pushing

the door handle request switch.

Operating range for engine start

function

The operating range for starting the en-

gine is inside the vehicle.

OIf the Intelligent Key is on the instru-

ment panel, rear parcel shelf, inside

the glove box or door pocket, or the

corner of interior compartment, it may

not be possible to start the engine.

OIf the Intelligent Key is near the door

or door glass outside the vehicle, it

may be possible to start the engine.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of

the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the

vehicle from being stolen, chime or beep

sounds inside and outside the vehicle

and a warning light comes on in the in-

strument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or the

warning light comes on, be sure to check

the vehicle and Intelligent Key.

Alarm and warning when locking

the doors

When the front door warning chime or

outside buzzer sounds, check for the fol-

lowing:

OThe ignition switch is turned to the

LOCK position.

OThe Intelligent Key is not left inside

the vehicle.

ODoors are closed securely.

OThe selector lever is in the P position.

SPA1901

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Alarm and warning when the

engine stops

When the P position selecting warning

light

in the instrument panel blinks in

red:

OMake sure the selector lever is in the

P position.

When the chime sounds intermittently:

OMake sure the selector lever is in the

P position and the ignition switch is

turned to the LOCK position.

If the chime sounds continuously when

the driver’s door is opened, check the fol-

lowing:

OThe selector lever is in the P position

and the ignition switch is turned to

the LOCK position.

OThe mechanical key or the valet key is

not inserted into the ignition switch.

OThe inside warning chime may stop

when one of the following is per-

formed.

— Returning the ignition switch to the

LOCK position.

— Removing the mechanical key or

the valet key.

— Closing the doors.

Alarm and warning when the

engine starts

When the Intelligent Key warning light

is blinking in red and the outside buzzer

sounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle.

Warning for low battery power

OThis warning is to let you know that

the battery of the Intelligent Key will

run down soon. Replace it with a new

one.

— The green blinking Intelligent Key

warning light

goes out about 30

seconds after the ignition switch is

turned to ON.

OWe recommend replacing the battery

at an INFINITI dealer.

Preventing the Intelligent Key

from being left in the vehicle

If you lock all doors using the power door

lock switch with the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle, all of the doors unlock immedi-

ately and the beep sounds to warn you

when the door is closed.

SPA1892

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the door handle

request switch The outside buzzer sounds for approxi-

mately 2 seconds. The doors cannot be locked.

Take out the Intelligent Key from the ve-

hicle and push the door handle request

switch.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion and push the door handle request

switch while carrying the Intelligent Key

with you.

Close all the doors securely and push the

door handle request switch while carrying

the Intelligent Key with you.

When closing the doors

The outside buzzer sounds for approxi-

mately 10 seconds. The ignition switch is not turned to the

LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion.

The Intelligent Key warning light in the

instrument panel blinks in red and the

outside buzzer sounds 3 times. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you.

The outside buzzer sounds for approxi-

mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. The Intelligent Key has been left in the

vehicle. Take out the Intelligent Key from the ve-

hicle and close the door.

When closing the trunk The outside buzzer sounds and the

trunk opens. The Intelligent Key has been left in the

trunk room. Take out the Intelligent Key from the trunk

room and close the trunk.

When opening the driver’s door An inside warning chime sounds con-

tinuously.

The ignition switch is not in the LOCK

position, or the mechanical key or valet

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion.

Remove the mechanical key or valet key

from the ignition switch.

When stopping the engine The P position selecting warning light

in the instrument panel blinks in red. The selector lever is not in the P posi-

tion. Make sure that the selector lever is in the P

position.

When turning the ignition switch An inside warning chime sounds con-

tinuously. The ignition switch is not turned to the

LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion.

When starting the engine The Intelligent Key warning light in the

instrument panel blinks in green. The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. See

“KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

When pushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key warning light in the

instrument panel comes on in red. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.

If the Intelligent Key warning light comes

on in red even while you are carrying the

Intelligent Key, the battery is completely

discharged. Replace the battery with a new

one. See “KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Troubleshooting examples

When it is difficult to turn the ignition

switch

OPush the ignition switch and turn it to

the left and then to the right.

OWhile gently turning the steering

wheel to the left or right, turn the igni-

tion switch.

OPERATION WITH INTELLIGENT

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,

fuel-filler door, activate the panic alarm

and open the windows by pushing the

buttons on the Intelligent Key from out-

side the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

key is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK /UNLOCK button on

the Intelligent Key can operate at a dis-

tance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from

the vehicle. (The effective distance de-

pends upon the conditions around the ve-

hicle.)

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used

with one vehicle. For information concern-

ing the purchase and use of additional In-

telligent Key, contact an INFINITI dealer.

The lock and unlock buttons on the Intel-

ligent Key will not operate when:

Othe Intelligent Key is too far away from

the vehicle

Othe Intelligent Key battery runs down

After locking with the Intelligent remote

keyless entry function, pull the door

handle to make sure the doors are se-

curely locked.

The operating range varies depending on

the environment. To securely operate the

lock and unlock buttons, approach the ve-

hicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.

The panic alarm will not activate when the

mechanical key or the valet key is in the ig-

nition switch.

LOCK button

UNLOCK button

TRUNK button

PANIC button

How to use remote keyless entry

system

Locking doors and fuel-filler door:

1. Remove the mechanical key or the va-

let key if any key is in the ignition

switch.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

SPA1895

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Push the LOCK button on the In-

telligent Key.

4. All doors and fuel-filler door will lock.

All of the doors will lock when the LOCK

button on the Intelligent Key is

pushed even though the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and

the horn chirps once.

OWhen the LOCK button is pushed

with all doors locked, the hazard indi-

cator flashes twice and the horn

chirps once as a reminder that the

doors are already locked.

*1: Doors lock with the Intelligent Key

while the mechanical key or the valet

key is in the ignition switch or the ig-

nition switch is pushed in.

*2: Doors do not lock with the Intelligent

Key while any door is open.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door:

1. Push the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key once.

OThe driver’s door and fuel-filler door

unlock

OThe hazard indicator flashes once if all

doors are completely closed with the

ignition switch in any position except

the ON position.

OThe interior light turns on and the

light timer activates for 30 seconds

when the switch is in the DOOR posi-

tion with the ignition switch in any po-

sition except the ON position.

2. Push the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key again within 5 seconds.

OAll doors unlock.

OThe hazard indicator flashes once if all

doors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute of pushing the

UNLOCK button.

Oopening any door

Othe ignition switch is pushed

Othe mechanical key or the valet key is

inserted into the ignition switch

The interior light can be turned off without

waiting for 30 seconds by turning the igni-

tion switch to the ON position or by locking

the doors with the Intelligent Key.

Opening the windows:

See “Opening and closing windows” on

the previous page.

Releasing the trunk lid:

1. Push and hold the TRUNK button

on the Intelligent Key for longer than

0.5 second when the ignition switch is

in any position except the ON posi-

tion.

2. The trunk lid opens.

The trunk lid cannot be opened by operat-

ing the Intelligent Key when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

Using the panic alarm:

If you are near your vehicle and feel

threatened, you may activate the alarm to

call attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC button on the In-

telligent Key for longer than 0.5 second

with the metal key removed from the

ignition switch or the ignition switch

not pushed in.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-

lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. The panic alarm stops when:

OIt has run for 25 seconds, or

OThe LOCK , UNLOCK ,

TRUNK or PANIC button

on the Intelligent Key is pushed for

longer than 0.5 second.

Hazard indicator and horn mode

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Keyfob or Intelligent Key HAZARD - twice No operation

Door handle request switch

Hazard indicator mode

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Keyfob or Intelligent Key HAZARD - twice

HORN-once HORN - once

Door handle request switch HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE BUZZER - twice

HORN - once

OUTSIDE BUZZER - once

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode:

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and

horn mode when you first receive the ve-

hicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when

the LOCK button is pushed, the haz-

ard indicator flashes twice and the horn

chirps once. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indica-

tor flashes once.

If horn are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indica-

tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, neither the hazard

indicator nor the horn operates.

Switching procedure:

Push the LOCK button and UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key simul-

taneously for more than 2 seconds to

switch from one mode to the other.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

When pushing the buttons to set hazard

indicator only mode, the hazard indicator

flashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard

indicator and horn mode, the hazard indi-

cator flashes once and the horn chirps

once.

OPERATION WITH THE

MECHANICAL KEY AND VALET KEY

If the Intelligent Key cannot be used be-

cause its battery is discharged, use the

metal key to lock or unlock the doors and

use the mechanical key or the valet key,

which is registered to the INFINITI Vehicle

Immobilizer System components, to start

the engine.

Removing the mechanical key

ORelease the lock knob at the back of

the Intelligent Key and remove the me-

chanical key.

OTo install the mechanical key to the In-

telligent Key, securely lock the lock

knob and then check that the me-

chanical key will not move.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with the

mechanical key installed in it.

Locking/unlocking the doors with

the metal key (mechanical key,

valet key and wallet key)

The doors can be locked/unlocked by in-

serting the metal key into the key cylinder

in the driver’s door in the same way as

the ordinary key.

Starting the engine with the

mechanical key

1. Securely depress the brake pedal.

2. Insert the mechanical key or the valet

key into the ignition switch.

SPA1878

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Turn the ignition switch to the START

position and start the engine.

4. After starting the engine, release the

switch.

When the engine is off, the steering wheel

lock cannot be unlocked.

For important safety information, see the

“5. Starting and driving” section.

Windows open/close with the

mechanical key

See “Opening and closing windows” on

the previous page.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

located below the instrument panel;

the hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Raise the lever

at the front of the

hood with your fingertips and raise

the hood.

3. Insert the assist bar into the slot

the front edge of the hood.

4. When closing the hood, reset the as-

sist bar to its original position, then

slowly close the hood and make sure

it locks into place.

WARNING

OMake sure the hood is completely closed

and latched before driving. Failure to do

so could cause the hood to fly open and

result in an accident.

OIf you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

SPA1632 SPA2158

HOOD

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

ODo not drive with the trunk lid open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases to

be drawn into the vehicle. See “Precau-

tions when starting and driving” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section for ex-

haust gas.

OClosely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

OPENER OPERATION

The trunk lid release switch

is located

at the bottom of the instrument panel.

To open the trunk lid, slide the trunk lid

release switch

or push the TRUNK but-

ton of the keyfob.

To close, push the trunk lid down se-

curely.

Trunk open request switch

Models without Intelligent Key system:

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing

the trunk open request switch

when

the front passenger inside lock knob is in

the unlock position.

Models with Intelligent Key system:

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing

the trunk open request switch when the

Intelligent Key is within the operating

range of the trunk lock/unlock function

regardless of the inside lock knob posi-

SPA2108 SPA1890

Sedan

TRUNK LID

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

tion. See “Intelligent Key system” earlier

in this section.

Cancel switch

When the cancel switch located inside the

glove box is pushed to the OFF side,

Othe trunk lid cannot be opened with

the trunk lid release switch.

Othe trunk lid cannot be opened by

pushing the trunk open request

switch.

Ofor models equipped with the Intelli-

gent Key system, the trunk lockout

protection function is not activated.

When the cancel switch located inside the

glove box is pushed to the OFF side, the

trunk lid can be opened with the TRUNK

button of the keyfob or Intelligent

Key.

SPA2182

Coupe

SPA1897

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

The interior trunk lid release mechanism

provides a means of escape in the event

of becoming locked inside the trunk.

The handle

is located on the back side

of the trunk lid inside the trunk compart-

ment.

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull

the release handle towards you until the

lock releases and push up on the trunk lid.

The release lever is made of a material that

glows in the dark after a brief exposure to

ambient light.

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE

The secondary trunk lid release mecha-

nism allows opening of the trunk lid in

the event of the loss of electrical power

such as a discharged battery.

The handle

is located on the back side

of the trunk lid inside the trunk compart-

ment.

Sedan

Access the handle through the interior

trunk access hole (rear seat armrest).

SPA1591B

Sedan

SPA1561A

Coupe

SPA1590A

Sedan

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,

pull the release handle towards front of ve-

hicle until the lock releases.

Return the handle to the original position

by securing the latch. Otherwise, it may

cause water to leak into the trunk.

Coupe

Access the handle from the rear seat.

Pull the strap

, located at center

bottom of the seatback sideways, and

then fold down the seatback

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,

pull the release handle towards front of ve-

hicle until the lock releases.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the

fuel-filler door lock by using one of the

following operations, then push the right-

hand side of the lid (Sedan), the left-hand

side of the lid (Coupe).

OPush the UNLOCK button on the

keyfob or Intelligent Key once.

OInsert the key into the door lock cylin-

der and turn the door key cylinder to

the rear of the vehicle.

OPush the power door lock switch to

the UNLOCK position.

SPA2122

Coupe

SPA1427C

Sedan

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

To lock, close the fuel-filler door and lock

the doors.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type.

Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting

clicks are heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder

while refueling.

WARNING

OGasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled. Al-

ways stop the engine and do not smoke

or allow open flames or sparks near the

vehicle when refueling.

OFuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap

a third of a turn, and wait for any

“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel

from spraying out and possibly causing

personal injury.

ODo not attempt to top off the fuel tank af-

ter the fuel pump nozzle shuts off auto-

matically. Continued refueling may

SPA1562A

Coupe

SPA1428B

Sedan

SPA1563A

Coupe

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel-

spray and possibly a fire.

OUse only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap can

result in a serious malfunction and pos-

sible injury. An incorrect cap could also

cause the malfunction indicator

lamp to illuminate.

ODo not fill a portable fuel container in the

vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can

cause an explosion of flammable liquid,

vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To

reduce the risk of serious injury or death

when filling portable fuel containers:

— Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact with

the container while you are filling it.

— Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

ONever pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

OIf fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

OTighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap prop-

erly may cause the malfunction in-

dicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate. If the

lamp illuminates because the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or

install the cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The lamp should turn off

after a few driving trips. If the lamp

does not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI

dealer.

OFor additional information, see the “Mal-

function indicator lamp (MIL)” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section.

MANUAL OPERATION

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your ve-

hicle and cause an accident.

Tilt operation

Pull the lock lever

down and adjust the

steering wheel up or down

to the de-

sired position.

SPA1946

STEERING WHEEL

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Push the lock lever up securely to lock

the steering wheel in place.

Telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever

down and adjust

the steering wheel forward or backward

to the desired position.

Push the lock lever up securely to lock

the steering wheel in place.

ELECTRIC OPERATION (if so

equipped)

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your ve-

hicle and cause an accident.

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever to adjust the steering

wheel up or down, forward or rearward to

the desired position.

Entry/Exit function operation (if so

equipped):

The automatic drive positioner system will

make the steering wheel move up

automatically when the key is removed

from the ignition switch. This lets the

driver get into and out of the seat more

easily. The steering wheel moves back

into position when the key is inserted into

the ignition switch. For more information,

see “Automatic drive positioner” later in

this section.

SPA1898

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

ODo not store the main sun visor before

storing the extension sun visor.

ODo not pull the extension sun visor forc-

edly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front,

swing down the main sun visor

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the main sun visor from the center

mount and swing it to the side

3. Draw out the extension sun visor

from the main sun visor to block from

further glare.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it

automatically changes reflection ac-

cording to the intensity of the headlight

of the following vehicle.

When the inside mirror is in the “I”

(AUTO) position

, excessive glare from

the headlights of the vehicle behind you

will be reduced. The AUTO indicator light

(green) will be on. When the switch of

the inside mirror is in the “q” (OFF) posi-

tion

, the inside mirror will operate nor-

mally.

SPA2176

SPA2157

SUN VISORS MIRRORS

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

For HomeLink Universal Transceiver, see

the description in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the

passenger side are closer than they appear.

Be careful when moving to the right. Using

only this mirror could cause an accident. Use

the inside mirror or glance over your

shoulder to properly judge distances to

other objects.

The outside mirror adjustment will op-

erate only when the ignition switch is in

the ACC or ON position.

Turn the control knob right or left to se-

lect the right or left outside mirror, then

adjust by tilting the control knob.

SPA1390

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it to-

ward the rear of the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER

OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system

has two features:

OEntry/exit function (only available on

models equipped with automatic

transmission)

OMemory storage function

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (if so

equipped)

This system is designed so that the driv-

er’s seat and steering column will auto-

matically move when the automatic trans-

mission selector lever is in the P (Park)

position. This allows the driver to get into

and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

(This feature is not available on models

equipped with manual transmission.)

The driver’s seat will slide backward and

the steering wheel will move up when the

driver’s door is opened with the key or ig-

nition switch in the LOCK position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will

return to the previous positions:

OWhen the key is inserted into the igni-

tion switch after closing the driver’s

door, or when the driver’s door is

closed after inserting the key into the

ignition switch.

OWhen the ignition switch is pushed

with the driver’s door closed.

OWhen the key or ignition switch is

turned to the ON position.

Initializing entry/exit function

The entry/exit function can be activated

or cancelled by pushing and holding the

SET switch for more than 10 seconds

while the ignition switch is in the LOCK

position. The indicator light will blink

once when the function is cancelled, and

the indicator light will blink twice when

the function is activated. If the battery

cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the entry/exit function will be can-

celled. In such a case, after connecting

the battery or replacing with a new fuse,

open and close the driver’s door more

than two times with the ignition switch or

ignition switch in the LOCK position. The

entry/exit function will be activated.

SPA1829

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so

equipped)

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Coupe

Sedan

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat and

steering column can be stored in the au-

tomatic drive positioner memory. Follow

these procedures to use the memory sys-

tem.

1. For vehicles equipped with automatic

transmission, move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position.

For vehicles equipped with manual

transmission, move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position and apply the

parking brake.

2. Adjust the driver’s seat and steering

column to the desired positions by

manually operating each adjusting

switch. For additional information, see

“Seats” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint

system” section and “Steering wheel”

earlier in this section.

3. Turn the ignition ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-

onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)

fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will come on and stay

on for approximately 5 seconds after

pushing the switch. After the indicator

light goes off, the selected positions

are stored in the selected memory (1

or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same

memory switch, the previous memory

will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob or Intelligent Key

to a stored memory position

A keyfob or Intelligent Key can be linked

to a stored memory position with the fol-

lowing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory

position.

2. While the indicator light for the

memory switch being set is illumi-

nated for 5 seconds, push the

button on the keyfob or Intelli-

gent Key. The indicator light will blink.

After the indicator light goes off, the

keyfob or Intelligent Key is linked to

that memory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition

switch, push the button on the

keyfob or Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat

and steering wheel will move to the

memorized position.

SPA2159

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Confirming memory storage

OTurn the ignition ON and push the SET

switch. If the main memory has not

been stored, the indicator light will

come on for approximately 0.5 sec-

onds. When the memory has stored in

position, the indicator light will stay

on for approximately 5 seconds.

OIf the battery cable is disconnected, or

if the fuse opens, the memory will be

canceled.

Reset the desired position using the

previous procedure.

Selecting the memorized position

1. For vehicles equipped with automatic

transmission, move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position.

For vehicles equipped with manual

transmission, move the shift lever in

the N (Neutral) position and apply the

parking brake.

2. Use one of the following methods to

move the driver’s seat and the

steering wheel.

OTurn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and push the memory

switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1

second.

OWithin 45 seconds of opening the

driver’s door, push the memory

switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1

second.

The driver’s seat and steering column

will move to the memorized position

with the indicator light flashing, and

then the light will stay on for approxi-

mately 5 seconds.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will

not work or will stop operating under the

following conditions:

Owhen the vehicle speed is above 4

MPH (7 km/h).

Owhen the adjusting switch for the driv-

er’s seat and steering column is

turned on while the automatic drive

positioner is operating.

Owhen the cancel switch (if so

equipped) is pushed to the CANCEL

side. (However, it will not be cancelled

if the switch is pushed while the seat

and steering column are returning to

the previous positions (entry/exit

function).)

Owhen the memory switch 1 or 2 is not

pushed and held for at least 1 second.

Owhen the seat has already been

moved to the memorized position.

Owhen no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

Owhen the parking brake is not applied.

— MT models

Owhen the speed is above 4 MPH (7

km/h) while the parking brake is ap-

plied. — MT models

To restart the drive positioner system,

move the parking brake to off and on.

Owhen the front seat is folded for oper-

ating the walk-in mechanism (if so

equipped).

when the engine is started while the

automatic drive positioner is operating.

Owhen the AT selector lever is moved

from the P position to any other posi-

tion. (However, it will not be cancelled

if the switch is pushed while the seat

and steering column are returning to

the previous positions (entry/exit

function).)

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Owhen the driver’s door remains open

for more than 45 seconds and the igni-

tion switch is not in the ON position.

CANCEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

When the CANCEL side of the switch is

pushed, the automatic drive positioner

system will not function.

When the AUTO side of the switch is

pushed, the system will function.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and

audio systems

Safety note....................................................... 4-2

Control panel buttons — with navigation

system ............................................................. 4-2

Names of the components .......................... 4-2

How to use joystick and “ENTER” button..... 4-3

How to use “BACK” button.......................... 4-3

Setting up the start-up screen..................... 4-3

How to use “INFO” button........................... 4-3

How to use “SETTING” button ..................... 4-7

How to use the button ........................ 4-9

Ventilators........................................................ 4-9

Heater and air conditioner (Automatic)............ 4-10

Automatic operation................................... 4-11

Manual operation....................................... 4-12

Dual button (if so equipped)...................... 4-12

Ambient temperature ................................. 4-13

Operating tips............................................ 4-13

In-cabin microfilter..................................... 4-13

Servicing air conditioner ................................. 4-14

Audio system .................................................. 4-14

FM radio reception..................................... 4-15

AM radio reception .................................... 4-15

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) ... 4-15

Audio operation precautions...................... 4-16

FM-AM-satellite radio with compact disc

(CD) changer ............................................. 4-22

CD care and cleaning ................................ 4-27

Steering wheel switch for audio control .... 4-28

Antenna .................................................... 4-29

Car phone or CB radio ................................... 4-29

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with

INFINITI Voice Recognition .............................. 4-30

Using the system ...................................... 4-32

Control buttons ......................................... 4-34

Getting started.......................................... 4-34

List of voice commands............................. 4-36

Speaker adaptation (SA) mode.................. 4-42

Troubleshooting guide .............................. 4-44

w06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

OPositioning of the heating or air condi-

tioning controls and display controls

should not be done while driving, in

order that full attention may be given to

driving operation.

ODo not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in acci-

dents, fire, or electric shock.

ODo not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the

system may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

OIn case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or

notice smoke or smell coming from it,

stop using the system immediately and

contact an INFINITI dealer. Ignoring such

conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or

electric shock.

When you use this system, make sure the

engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will use up all the battery power,

and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button — This is a button on the

control panel.

“Display” key — This is a select key on

the screen. By selecting this key you can

proceed to the next function.

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS

1., 2., 5., 6., 9., 10. and 11.

For Navigation control buttons: refer to

the separate Navigation Owner’s Manual.

3. “SETTING” button (P. 4-7)

4. “INFO” button (P. 4-3)

7. Joystick and “ENTER” button (P. 4-3)

8. brightness control button

(P. 4-9)

12. “BACK” button (P. 4-3)

SAA1301

SAFETY NOTE CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND

“ENTER” BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using the

joystick and push the “ENTER” button for

operation.

HOW TO USE “BACK” BUTTON

This button has two functions.

OGo back to the previous display.

When this button is pushed during setup,

setup will be canceled, and the screen

will return to the previous screen.

OFinish setup.

When this button is pushed after setup is

completed, the settings will be renewed

as directed, and the screen will return to

the map.

SETTING UP THE START-UP

SCREEN

When you turn the ignition switch to the

ACC or ON position, the SYSTEM

START-UP warning is displayed on the

screen. Read the warning and select the

“OK” key then push the “ENTER” button.

If you do not push the “ENTER” button,

the Navigation system will not proceed to

the next step display.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

HOW TO USE “INFO” BUTTON

The “Vehicle Information” screen will ap-

pear when the “INFO” button is pushed.

Choose an item using the joystick and

push the “ENTER” button.

After viewing or adjusting the information

on the following screens, push the

“BACK” button to return to the VEHICLE

INFORMATION menu.

SAA1304

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Fuel economy information

The distance to empty, average fuel

economy and current fuel economy

(shown on the right side bar) will be dis-

played for reference.

To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use

the joystick to highlight the “Reset” key

and push the “ENTER” button.

If the “View” key is highlighted with the

joystick and the “ENTER” button is

pushed, the average fuel consumption

history will be displayed in graph form

along with the average for the previous

Reset-to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between “US”

and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTING

button” later in this section.

SAA1074 SAA1075

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Trip computer information

Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Av-

erage Speed will be displayed.

To reset, use the joystick to highlight the

“Reset” key and push the “ENTER” button

immediately before driving the vehicle.

The unit can be converted between “US”

and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTING

button” later in this section.

Maintenance information

To set the maintenance interval for the

Engine Oil or Oil Filter, choose an item

using the joystick and push the “ENTER”

button.

You can also set to display a message to

remind you that the maintenance needs

to be performed.

The following example shows how to set

the engine oil change interval. Use the

same steps to set the other maintenance

information.

1. Reset the driving distance to the new

maintenance schedule.

2. Set the interval (mileage) of the main-

tenance schedule. To determine the

recommended maintenance interval,

refer to your “INFINITI Service and

Maintenance Guide”.

3. To display the maintenance informa-

tion automatically when the set

trip distance is reached, highlight the

“Interval Reminder” key with the joy-

stick and push the “ENTER” button.

SAA1305 SAA1290 SAA1291

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. To return the display to the “Mainte-

nance” screen, push the “BACK”

button.

“Maintenance” display cannot be oper-

ated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place to see the informa-

tion.

Maintenance notice

The “Maintenance Notice” screen (“EN-

GINE OIL” or “OIL FILTER”) will be auto-

matically displayed as shown when both

of the following conditions are met:

Othe vehicle is driven the set distance

and the ignition switch is turned to

the OFF position.

Othe ignition switch is turned to the ON

position the next time the vehicle will

be driven.

To return to the previous display after the

“Maintenance Notice” screen is dis-

played, push the “BACK” button.

The “Maintenance Notice” screen displays

each time the ignition switch is turned ON

until one of the following conditions are

met:

O“Reset Display” is selected.

O“Interval Reminder” is set OFF.

Othe maintenance interval is set again.

SAA1332 SAA1292

Engine Oil q

1/Oil Filter q

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

*: Refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE “SETTING” BUTTON

The “Settings” screen will appear when

the “SETTING” button is pushed.

Display settings

The following menu will appear when

pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting

the “Display” key and pushing the

“ENTER” button.

Display:

To turn off the screen, select the “Dis-

play” key and push the “ENTER” button to

turn off the “ON” indicator. When any

mode button is pushed with the screen

off, the screen turns on for further opera-

tion. The screen will turn off automatically

5 seconds after the operation is finished

on the map display.

To turn on the screen, select the “Dis-

play” key and turn on the “ON” indicator.

Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:

To adjust the brightness and contrast of

the screen, select the “Brightness”or

“Contrast” key and push the “ENTER”

button. Then you can adjust the bright-

ness to darker or brighter and the con-

trast to lower or higher using the joystick.

For information on the “Background

Color” key, refer to the separate Naviga-

tion System Owner’s Manual.

SAA1293 SAA1294

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Clock settings

The following display will appear when

pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting

the “Clock” key and pushing the “ENTER”

button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned to ON, a clock is

always displayed in the upper right corner

of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost

exactly because it is always adjusted by

the GPS system.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12-hour clock display or

the 24-hour clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Adjust the time by increasing or de-

creasing per minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

Turn this item to ON for daylight saving

time application.

Time Zone:

Choose the time zone from the following

OPacific

OMountain

OCentral

OEastern

OAtlantic

ONewfoundland

Language/Units settings

The Language/Units setting screen will

appear when selecting the “Language/

Units” key and pushing the “ENTER”

button.

SAA1091 SAA1295

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Select the “Select Language”or“Select

Units” key and push the “ENTER” button.

Language: “English” or “Français”

Unit: “US” — Mile, °F, MPG

“Metric” — km, °C, L/100 km

Select the “ON” key of the desired lan-

guage or units and push the “ENTER” but-

ton.

HOW TO USE THE BUTTON

To change the display brightness, push

the button. Pushing the button again

will change the display to DAY or NIGHT

display. Then, adjust the brightness mov-

ing the joystick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds,

or if the “BACK” button is pushed, the

display will return to the previous display.

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow di-

rection of ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the

vents are closed when the vent le-

ver is moved left (front) or down

(rear).

: This symbol indicates that the

vents are open when the vent

lever is moved right (front) or up

(rear).

SAA1296

Display of Select Language

SAA0563A

Front

VENTILATORS

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Front window defroster button

2. Rear window defroster button

(Refer to the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.)

3. Outside air circulation button

4. Air recirculation button

5. AUTO/ECON button

6. Fan speed control button

7. MODE (air flow control) button

8. A/C (Air Conditioner) button

9. OFF button

10. DUAL button (if so equipped)

11. TEMP (Temperature control) dial

SAA0564B

Rear (if so equipped)

SAA1306

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(Automatic)

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

OThe air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

OOn hot, sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals. Do

not leave children or adults who would

normally require the assistance of

others in your vehicle. Unattended pets

should also not be left alone.

ODo not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

OPositioning of the heater and/or air con-

ditioner controls should not be done

while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the controls

to activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified

heating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all year

round as the system automatically works

to keep a constant temperature. Air flow

distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO/ECON button on.

(AUTO will be displayed.)

2. If the A/C button indicator is off, push

the A/C button to activate air condi-

tioner. The A/C button indicator will

come on.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

set the desired temperature.

OAdjust the temperature to about 75°F

(24°C) for normal operation.

OThe temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution and fan

speed are also controlled automati-

cally.

Economical operation (ECON)

Economical operation reduces some load

to the engine to improve the fuel

economy. It allows higher humidity than

normal operation.

Pushing the AUTO/ECON button changes

operations as follows while the A/C

button indicator is on. AUTO →ECON →

AUTO

Heating (A/C off)

The air conditioner does not activate.

When you need to heat only, use this

mode.

1. Push the AUTO/ECON button. (AUTO

will be displayed.)

2. Push the A/C button to turn off the air

conditioner. The A/C button indicator

will turn off.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

set the desired temperature.

OThe temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution and fan

speed are also controlled automati-

cally.

ODo not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Otherwise

the system may not work properly.

ONot recommended if windows fog up.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Dehumidified defrosting or

defogging

1. Push the front window defroster

button on. (The indicator light on

the button will come on.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to

set the desired temperature.

OTo quickly remove ice from the outside

of the windows, push the fan speed

control button + and set to the

maximum position.

OAs soon as possible after the wind-

shield is clean, push the AUTO/ECON

button to return to the auto mode.

OWhen the front window defroster

button is pushed, the air condi-

tioner will automatically be turned on

at outside temperatures above 23°F

(−5°C) to defog the windshield, and

the air recirculation mode will auto-

matically be turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the pas-

senger compartment to improve the

defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Push the fan speed control button −

or + to manually control the fan

speed.

Push the AUTO/ECON button to return to

automatic control of the fan speed.

Fresh air

Push the outside air circulation button

to draw outside air into the passen-

ger compartment. The indicator light on

the button will come on.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

The indicator light on the button will

come on.

The air recirculation button will not be ac-

tivated when the air conditioner is in the

defroster mode.

Air flow control (MODE)

Pushing the MODE button selects the air

outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side

ventilators.

: Air flows from center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.

To turn the system off

Push the OFF button.

DUAL BUTTON (if so equipped)

You can set the temperature of the driver

and front passenger sides individually.

Pushing the DUAL button changes the set-

ting position as follows:

Driver/Passenger →Driver →Passenger

If selecting the Driver/Passenger position

again after the temperature is individually

set, the display will show the temperature

set for the driver side.

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

The outside ambient temperature will be

shown on the center display.

The ambient temperature sensor is lo-

cated in front of the radiator. The sensor

may be affected by road or engine heat,

wind direction and other driving condi-

tions. The display may differ from the ac-

tual outside temperature or the tempera-

ture displayed on various signs or bill-

boards.

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air

flow from the foot outlets may not operate

for a maximum of 150 seconds. However,

this is not a malfunction. After the coolant

temperature warms up, the air flow from

the foot outlets will operate normally.

The sensor

on the instrument panel

helps maintain a constant temperature;

do not put anything on or around this

sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioning system is equipped

with an in-cabin microfilter which collects

dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure air

conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates

efficiently, replace the filter in accordance

with the maintenance schedule in the

INFINITI Service and maintenance guide.

To replace the filter, contact an INFINITI

dealer.

The filter should be replaced if air flow de-

creases significantly or if windows fog up

easily when operating the heater or air

conditioning system.

HA1011-A

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The air conditioning system in your

INFINITI vehicle is charged with a refriger-

ant designed with the environment in

mind. This refrigerant will not harm the

earth’s ozone layer. However, special

charging equipment and lubricant are re-

quired when servicing your INFINITI air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants

or lubricants will cause severe damage to

your air conditioning system. See “Ca-

pacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-

sumer information” section for air condi-

tioning system refrigerant and lubricant

recommendations.

An INFINITI dealer will be able to service

your environmentally friendly air condi-

tioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refriger-

ant under high pressure. To avoid personal

injury, any air conditioner service should be

done only by an experienced technician with

proper equipment.

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and push the POWER or RADIO

button to turn on the radio. If you listen to

the radio with the engine not running, the

key should be turned to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-

nal strength, distance from radio trans-

mitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and

other external influences. Intermittent

changes in reception quality normally are

caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception

quality.

Radio reception

Your radio system is equipped with state-

of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance

radio reception. These circuits are de-

signed to extend reception range, and to

enhance the quality of that reception.

However there are some general charac-

teristics of FM, AM and satellite radio sig-

nals that can affect radio reception

quality in a moving vehicle, even when

the finest equipment is used. These char-

acteristics are completely normal in a

given reception area, and do not indicate

any malfunction in your radio system.

Remember that a moving vehicle is not

the ideal place to listen to a radio. Be-

cause of the movement, reception condi-

tions will constantly change. Buildings,

terrain, signal distance and interference

from other vehicles can work against

ideal reception. Described below are

some of the factors that can affect your

radio reception.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25

to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural

(single channel) FM having slightly more

range than stereo FM. External influences

may sometimes interfere with FM station

reception even if the FM station is within

25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM

signal is directly related to the distance

between the transmitter and receiver. FM

signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhib-

iting many of the same characteristics as

light. For example they will reflect off ob-

jects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves

away from a station transmitter, the sig-

nals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-

ence from buildings, large hills or due to

antenna position, usually in conjunction

with increased distance from the station

transmitter, static or flutter can be heard.

This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control counterclockwise to reduce

treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the re-

flective characteristics of FM signals, di-

rect and reflected signals reach the re-

ceiver at the same time. The signals may

cancel each other, resulting in momentary

flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low fre-

quency, can bend around objects and

skip along the ground. In addition, the

signals can be bounced off the iono-

sphere and bent back to earth. Because

of these characteristics. AM signals are

also subject to interference as they travel

from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is

passing through freeway underpasses or

in areas with many tall buildings. It can

also occur for several seconds during

ionospheric turbulence even in areas

where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, elec-

trical power lines, electric signs and even

traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so

equipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed

or the battery has been replaced, the sat-

ellite radio may not work properly. This is

not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 min-

utes with satellite radio ON for satellite

radio to receive all of the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available

unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and an XM or

SIRIUS

satellite radio service subscrip-

tion is active.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska

and Hawaii.

Satellite radio performance may be af-

fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks

the satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the sat-

ellite antenna.

SAA0306

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact Disc (CD) player

ODuring cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

OThe player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

OThe CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the passenger compartment

temperature is extremely high. De-

crease the temperature before use.

OOnly use high quality 4.7 inches (12

cm) round discs that have the “COM-

PACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the

disc or packaging.

ODo not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

OCDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints, or

that have pin holes may not work prop-

erly.

OThe following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

ODo not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion.

— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

— CDs that are not round

— CDs with a paper label

— CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

OCDs with MP3 or WMA format cannot be

written in this audio system.

OIf the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

SAA0480

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHECK DISC:

• Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

• Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is a malfunction due to excessive

temperature inside the player. Remove

the CD by pushing the EJECT button. Af-

ter a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD

can be played when the temperature of

the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Compact Disc (CD) with MP3 or

WMA

Explanation of terms:

OMP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pic-

tures Experts Group Audio Layer 3.

MP3 is the most well-known com-

pressed digital audio file format. This

format allows for near “CD quality”

sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of

an audio track from CD-ROM can re-

duce the file size by approximately

10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible

loss in quality. MP3 compression re-

moves the redundant and irrelevant

parts of a sound signal that the

human ear doesn’t hear.

OWMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)

is a compressed audio format created

by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3.

The WMA codec offers greater file

compression than the MP3 codec, en-

abling storage of more digital audio

tracks in the same amount of space

when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

OBit rate — Bit rate denotes the number

of bits per second used by a digital

music file. The size and quality of a

compressed digital audio file is deter-

mined by the bit rate used when en-

coding the file.

OSampling frequency — Sampling fre-

quency is the rate at which the

samples of a signal are converted

from analog to digital (A/D conversion)

per second.

OMultisession — Multisession is one of

the methods for writing data to media.

Writing data once to the media is

called a single session, and writing

more than once is called a multises-

sion.

OID3/WMA Tag — The ID3 tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file

that contains information about the

digital music file such as song title,

artist, album title, encoding bit rate,

track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-

mation is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the

display.

* Windows and Windows Media are

either registered trademarks or trade-

marks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Playback order:

Playback order of the CD with compressed

files (MP3/WMA) is as illustrated above.

OThe names of folders not containing

MP3/WMA files are not shown in the

display.

OIf there is a file in the top level of the

disc, “ROOT” is displayed.

OThe playback order is the order in

which the files were written by the

writing software. Therefore, the files

might not play in the desired order.

SAA1025

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not sup-

ported.

Supported versions*

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder),

Files: 512

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16

BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM

Big Endian), 05: (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16

BOM Little Endian)

* Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate

cannot be played.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the

player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be

played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and

number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

The bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time be-

fore the music starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before

the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might

not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next

song when playing.

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by

The songs do not play back in the

desired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in

the desired order.

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. CD EJECT button

2. CD play button

3. RADIO (FM/AM/SAT*) band select

button

4. Audio display

5. PTY/CAT (Type A), SSV (Type B) button

6. DISP (Display) CHANGE button

7. SEEK, APS REW/APS FF, TRACK

CHANGE button

8. CD LOAD button

9. POWER ONzOFF button, Volume control

knob

10. AUTOzP (Automatic preset) button

11. RPT (repeat) play (Type A), RPT (re-

peat) play/CAT button (Type B)

12. SCAN tuning button

13. Station preset (FM/AM/SAT)/CD insert

or CD play select button

14. AUDIO (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BAL-

ANCE, SSV (Type A only)) button

15. RADIO TUNE/FFzREW/AUDIO (BASS,

TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SSV (Type A

only)) ADJUSTING button

* No satellite radio reception is available

unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed and an XM or

SIRIUS

satellite radio service sub-

scription is active.

SAA0937

Type A

SAA0938

Type B

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

It may take some time to receive the acti-

vation signal after subscribing to the XM

or SIRIUS

satellite radio provider. After

receiving the activation signal, an avail-

able channel list will be automatically up-

dated in the radio. For XM , turn the igni-

tion switch from the LOCK to ACC position

to update the channel list.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska

and Hawaii.

FM-AM-SATELLITE RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The radio has an FM diversity reception

system, which employs two antennas

printed on the rear window. This system

automatically switches to the antenna

which is receiving less interference.

The auto loudness circuit enhances the

low frequency range automatically in both

radio reception and CD playback.

POWER on/off:

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, and then push the POWER

on/off button while the system is off to

call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which

was playing immediately before the

system was turned off. When no CD or

tape is loaded, the radio will come on.

While the system is on, pushing the

POWER on/off button turns the system

off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust

the volume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive control

Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume

changes as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER,

BALANCE, SSV (Type A only)):

Push the AUDIO button to change the se-

lecting mode as follows.

BASS →TREBLE →FADER →BALANCE →

SSV (Type A only) →(Normal) →BASS

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Bal-

ance, push the AUDIO button until the de-

sired mode BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BAL-

ANCE appears in the display. Push the

TUNE

(or ) button to adjust Bass and

Treble to the desired level. Use the

or button also to adjust Fader

or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear

speakers and Balance adjusts the sound

between the right and left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW,

MID or HIGH, push the or (TUNE)

button (Type A) or push the SSV button

(Type B).

After 10 seconds, the radio, or CD display

reappears. Once the sound quality is set

to the desired level, push the AUDIO but-

ton repeatedly until the radio, or CD dis-

play appears.

DISPLAY CHANGE:

This button will work during FM radio, sat-

ellite radio (if so equipped) and CD opera-

tion. Find the detailed function in the de-

scription of each item.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

RADIO (FM/AM/SAT) band select:

Pushing the band select button will

change the band as follows:

(Without satellite radio)

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

(With satellite radio)

AM →FM1 →FM2 →SAT1 →SAT2 →AM

No satellite radio reception is available

unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and an XM or SIRI-

satellite radio service subscription

is active.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska

and Hawaii.

When the RADIO band select button is

pushed while the ignition switch is in the

ACC or ON position, the radio will come

on at the station last played.

The last station/channel played will also

come on when the ONzOFF/VOL control

knob is pushed to ON.

If another audio source is playing when

the RADIO button is turned to ON, the

other audio source will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station

played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow

during FM stereo reception. When the ste-

reo broadcast signal is weak, the radio

will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned while driving

so full attention may be given to vehicle op-

eration.

Push these buttons for manual tuning. To

move quickly through the channels, push

and hold either of the TUNE buttons down

for more than 0.5 second.

SEEK tuning:

For AM and FM radio:

Push the SEEK button or ,to

tune from high to low or low to high fre-

quencies and stops at the next broadcast-

ing station.

For satellite radio:

Push the SEEK button or to

seek channels of the next or previous cat-

egory.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from

low to high frequencies and stops at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Push-

ing the button again during this 5 sec-

onds period will stop SCAN tuning and

the radio will remain tuned to that sta-

tion.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed

within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to

the next station.

DISPLAY:

OBy pushing the DISP button for more

than 1.5 seconds while receiving FM

radio waves, “PS NAME” switches be-

tween ON and OFF (Type A only).

OPushing the DISP button will display

additional information about the satel-

lite radio broadcast (for example:

Artist name, Title).

Keep pushing the DISP button, and it

will change the information of the sat-

ellite radio broadcast to be displayed

as follows:

CH Number →CH Name →Artist

Name →Song Title →CH Number

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Station memory operations:

Twelve stations/channels can be set for

the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2),

twelve for satellite radio (six for SAT1, six

for SAT2) and six stations can be set for

the AM band.

1. Tune to the desired station using the

SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.

2. Select the desired station/channel

and keep pushing any of the desired

station preset buttons (1 to 6) until a

beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes

when the select button is pushed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come

on and the sound will resume. Memo-

rizing is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if

the fuse blows, the preset station memory

will be erased. In that case, reset the de-

sired stations.

Automatic preset:

To select the preset FM, AM, SAT or PTY

station/channel, push the AUTO.P button

for less than 1.5 seconds.

To preset the FM, AM, SAT or PTY

station/channel, push the AUTO.P button

for more than 1.5 seconds.

Program type/category (Type A)

Repeat/category (Type B):

When the PTY button is pushed for more

than 1.5 seconds during FM mode, the PTY

name of the current tuned station is dis-

played (Type A only). During this time if

the PTY data code is zero, or the data is

unreadable; the display will show NONE.

When the PTY (CAT) — type A, or RPT (CAT)

— Type B, button is pushed for more than

1.5 seconds during the satellite radio

mode, the category name of the current

channel is displayed.

1. PTY (CAT) selection mode

PTY (CAT) name selection can be done

by the up/down TUNE button or

in the PTY (CAT) selection mode.

It is possible to shift the PTY (CAT) name

by one step, with one push of the

up/down tuning button or .

PTY name selection can also be achieved

by pushing the preset buttons.

Initial PTY names are stored in the station

preset buttons; but these can be changed

by pushing the station preset buttons for

more than 1.5 seconds when the desired

PTY name is in the display.

2. PTY SEEK tuning mode

After selecting a PTY name, push the

SEEK button or within 10

seconds. Tuning to the PTY station will

start. If you do not push the SEEK but-

ton within the 10 second period, the

PTY mode will be canceled.

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. PTY SCAN tuning mode

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune

the PTY name station, and stop at

each broadcasting station for 5 sec-

onds. Pushing the button again during

this 5 second period will stop SCAN

tuning and the radio will remain tuned

to that station. If the SCAN tuning but-

ton is not pushed within 5 seconds,

SCAN tuning moves to the next sta-

tion.

Compact disc (CD) changer

operation

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, push the LOAD button and insert

the compact disc into the slot with the la-

bel side facing up. The CD will be guided

automatically into the slot and start play-

ing.

After loading the disc, the number of

tracks on the disc and the play time will

appear on the display.

If the radio is already operating, it will au-

tomatically turn off and the CD will play.

CAUTION

ODo not force the compact disc into the

slot. This could damage the player.

ODo not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

If the system has been turned off while

the CD was playing, pushing the

ONzOFF/VOL control button will start the

compact disc.

CD LOAD:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push

the LOAD button for less than 1.5 sec-

onds. Select the loading slot by pushing

the CD insert select button (1 to 6), then

insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in suc-

cession, push the LOAD button for more

than 1.5 seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminate

on the display.

PLAY:

When the CD button is pushed with the

system off and the compact disc loaded,

the system will turn on and the compact

disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the

CD loaded with the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and

the compact disc will start to play.

DISPLAY:

When the display button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is be-

ing played, the music information dis-

played can be changed in the following

order.

CD:

CD with MP3 or WMA:

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind):

CD:

When the (fast forward) or (re-

wind) button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the CD will play

while fast forwarding or rewinding. When

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

the button is released, the CD will return

to normal play speed.

CD with MP3 or WMA:

When the or button is pushed

for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is

being played, the folders in the CD will be

changed.

When the or button is pushed

for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is

being played, the CD will play while fast

forwarding or rewinding. When the button

is released, the CD will return to the

normal play speed.

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW:

When the (APS FF) button is pushed

while the CD is being played, the program

after the present one will start to play

from its beginning. Push several times to

skip through programs. The CD will ad-

vance the number of times the button is

pushed. (When the last program on the

CD is skipped through, the first program

will be played.) When the (APS REW)

button is pushed, the program being

played returns to its beginning. Push sev-

eral times to skip back through programs.

The CD will go back the number of times

the button is pushed.

CD PLAY select button:

To change CD, push the CD play select

button (1 to 6).

SCAN tuning:

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed

for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is

being played, the beginning of all the CD

programs in each track will be played for

10 seconds in sequence.

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed

for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is

being played, the first program in all the

CDs will be played for 10 seconds.

Pushing the button again during this 10

second period will stop SCAN tuning.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed

within 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to

the next disc program.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while the

CD is played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

CD with MP3 or WMA:

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with

the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD se-

lect button, push the EJECT button for less

than 1.5 seconds.

To eject all the discs, push the EJECT but-

ton for more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while the CD

is being played, CD will come out and the

system will turn off.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect

it.

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display

when the CD is loaded with the system

on.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

OHandle a CD by its edges. Never touch

the surface of the disc. Do not bend

the disc.

OAlways place the discs in the storage

case when they are not being used.

OTo clean a disc, wipe the surface from

the center to the outer edge using a

clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc

using a circular motion.

Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-

trial use.

OA new disc may be rough on its inner

and outer edges. Remove the rough

edges using the side of a pen or pen-

cil as illustrated.

SAA0451

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. VOLUME control switch

2. POWER on/off switch

3. MODE select switch

4. Tuning switch

5. POWER on/MODE select switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using

the controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition switch turned to the ACC

or ON position, push the POWER switch to

turn the audio system on or off.

MODE select switch

Push the MODE select switch to change

the mode in the sequence of AM, FM1,

FM2, SAT1 (if so equipped), SAT2 (if so

equipped) and CD.

Pushing this switch also turns the audio

system on when it is off.

POWER on/MODE select switch (if

so equipped)

With the ignition switch turned to the ACC

or ON position, push the POWER

on/MODE select switch to turn the audio

system on. Push the switch to change the

mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2,

SAT1 (if so equipped), SAT2 (if so

equipped) and CD.

VOLUME control switch

Push up/down the VOLUME control switch

to increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

Memory change (radio):

Push up/down the tuning switch or

for less than 1.5 seconds to change

the radio frequency.

SEEK tuning (radio):

Push up/down the tuning switch or

for more than 1.5 seconds to seek

the next or previous radio station.

APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS

REW (CD):

Push up/down the tuning switch or

for less than 1.5 seconds to return to

the beginning of the present program or

skip to the next program. Push several

times to skip back or skip through pro-

grams.

SAA0974

Type A

SAA1349

Type B

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

This system searches for the blank inter-

vals between selections. If there is a

blank interval within one program or there

is no interval between programs, the sys-

tem may not stop in the desired or ex-

pected location.

FOLDER change (CD with MP3/WMA):

Push up/down the tuning switch or

for more than 1.5 seconds to change

the folders (if it has folders).

Push up/down the tuning switch or

for less than 1.5 seconds to return to

the beginning of the present program or

skip to the next program.

DISC change (CD without MP3/WMA):

Push up/down the tuning switch or

for more than 1.5 seconds to change

the playing disc up or down.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the

rear window.

CAUTION

ODo not place metalized film near the rear

window glass or attach any metal parts

to it. This may cause poor reception or

noise.

OWhen cleaning the inside of the rear win-

dow, be careful not to scratch or damage

the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe

along the antenna with a dampened soft

cloth.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car

phone in your INFINITI, be sure to observe

the following cautions, otherwise the new

equipment may adversely affect the En-

gine control system and other electronic

parts.

WARNING

OA cellular telephone should not be used

while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation. Some juris-

dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-

phones while driving.

OIf you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellular

phone operational mode (if so equipped)

is highly recommended. Exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

OIf a conversation in a moving vehicle re-

quires you to take notes, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop your vehicle

before doing so.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

OKeep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control mod-

ules.

OKeep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic control

system harness. Do not route the an-

tenna wire next to any harness.

OAdjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

OConnect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

OFor details, consult an INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

OUse a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

OIf a conversation in a moving vehicle re-

quires you to take notes, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop your vehicle

before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a

phone after starting the engine.

BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

WITH INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your INFINITI is equipped with the

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If

you are an owner of a Bluetooth enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wire-

less connection between your cellular

phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth wireless technology, you

can make or receive a hands-free tele-

phone call with your cellular phone in the

vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the

in-vehicle phone module, no other phone

connecting procedure is required. Your

phone is automatically connected with

the in-vehicle phone module when the ig-

nition switch is turned to the ON position

with the paired cellular phone turned on

and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different

Bluetooth cellular phones to the in-

vehicle phone module. However, you can

talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following

notes.

OSet up the wireless connection be-

tween a cellular phone and the in-

vehicle phone module before using

the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem.

OSome Bluetooth enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized by the

in-vehicle phone module. Please visit

www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for a rec-

ommended phone list.

OYou will not be able to use a hands-

free phone under the following condi-

tions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the tele-

phone service area.

SAA1302

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

— Your vehicle is in an area where it

is difficult to receive radio waves;

such as in a tunnel, in an under-

ground parking garage, near a tall

building or in a mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked to

prevent it from being dialed.

When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may

be difficult to hear the other person’s

voice during a call.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connec-

tion disruption.

While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth wireless connec-

tion, the battery power of the cellular

phone may discharge quicker than usual.

If the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone

System seems to be malfunctioning,

please refer to “Troubleshooting guide”

later in this section. You can also visit

www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual regarding the telephone charges,

cellular phone antenna and body, etc.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) this device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an un-

controlled environment. This equipment

should be installed and operated with

minimum distance 8 inch (20 cm) be-

tween the radiator and your body. This

Transmitter must not be co-located or op-

erating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

USING THE SYSTEM

The INFINITI Voice Recognition system al-

lows hands-free operation of the

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some com-

mands may not be available so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is

initialized, which takes a few seconds.

When completed, the amber light on the

overhead console illuminates and the

system is ready to accept voice com-

mands. If the button is pushed be-

fore the initialization completes, the

system will announce “Hands-free phone

system not ready” and will not react to

voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the

INFINITI Voice Recognition system, ob-

serve the following:

OKeep the interior of the vehicle as

quiet as possible. Close the windows

to eliminate surrounding noises

(traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),

which may prevent the system from

recognizing voice commands correctly.

Wait until the tone sounds before

speaking a command. Otherwise, the

command will not be received properly.

OStart speaking a command within 5

seconds after the tone sounds.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OSpeak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition,

push and release the button located

on the steering wheel. The light on the

overhead console flashes to signal you

have entered a voice recognition (VR) ses-

sion. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

The command given is picked up by the

microphone, and voice feedback is given

when the command is accepted.

OIf you need to hear the available com-

mands for the current menu again, say

“Help” and the system will repeat

them.

OIf a command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Command not

recognized. Please try again.” Repeat

the command in a clear voice.

OIf you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or

“Correction” anytime the system is

waiting for a response.

OYou can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by

saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system

announces “Cancel” and ends the VR

session. You can also push the

button on the steering wheel at

any time. Whenever the VR session is

cancelled, a double beep is played to

indicate you have exited the system.

OIf you want to adjust the volume of the

voice feedback, push the volume con-

trol switches (+ or -) on the steering

wheel while being provided with feed-

back. You can also use the radio

volume control knob.

How to say numbers

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer-

tain way to speak numbers in voice com-

mands. Refer to the rules and examples

below.

OEither “zero” or “oh” can be used for

“0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight oh oh six six two six two

oh oh”, or

—“One eight zero zero six six two six

two oh oh”

OWords can be used for the first 4 dig-

its places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight hundred six six two six

two oh oh”,

—NOT “One eight hundred six six two

sixty two hundred, and

—NOT “One eight oh oh six six two

sixty two hundred.

ONumbers can be spoken in small

groups. The system will prompt you to

continuing entering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight oh oh”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

—“six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

—“six two oh oh”

OYou can say “Star” for * and “Pound”

for # at anytime in any position of the

phone number.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

—“One five five five one two one two

star one two three”

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-33

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as

single digits.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System are located on

the steering wheel.

TALK/PHONE SEND

Push the button to initiate a VR

session or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button to

skip through system feedback and to

enter commands during a call. See

“List of voice commands” and “During

a call” later in this section for more in-

formation.

MODE/PHONE END

Push the button to cancel a VR

session or end a call.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get

started using the Bluetooth Hands-Free

Phone System with INFINITI Voice Recog-

nition. For additional command options,

refer to “List of voice commands” later in

this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System using English,

Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the fol-

lowing.

1. Press and hold the button for

more than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the

hands-free phone system to enter the

speaker adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END ( ) button to select a

different language.”

SAA1303

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adapta-

tion, see “Speaker adaptation (SA)

mode” later in this section.

4. The system announces the current lan-

guage and gives you the option to

change the language to Spanish (in

Spanish) or French (in French). Use the

following chart to select the language.

NOTE:

Note: You must press the button or

the button within 5 seconds to

change the language.

Current

language

Press

(TALK/PHONE

SEND)

to select

Press

(MODE/PHONE

END)

to select

English Spanish French

Spanish English French

French English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the lan-

guage, do not press either button.

After 5 seconds, the VR session will

end, and the language will not be

changed.

Pairing procedure

1. Push the button on the steering

wheel. The system announces the

available commands.

2. Say: “Setup”

. The system acknowl-

edges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone”

. The system ac-

knowledges the command and an-

nounces the next set of available com-

mands.

4. Say: “New phone”

. The system ac-

knowledges the command and asks

you to initiate pairing from the phone

handset

When you are asked to enter a PIN

code for pairing your Bluetooth cellu-

lar phone, operate it to enter the code

“1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless

of the number of phones paired.

The pairing procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cel-

lular phone manufacturer. See the cel-

lular phone Owner’s Manual for de-

tails. You can also visit

www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for in-

structions on pairing INFINITI recom-

mended cellular phones.

5. The system asks you to say a name for

the phone

If the name is too long or too short,

the system tells you, then prompts

you for a name again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired

and the name sounds too much like a

name already used, the system tells

you, then prompts you for a name

again.

6. The system asks you to assign a prior-

ity level

. The priority level deter-

mines which phone is active when

more than one paired Bluetooth

phone is in the vehicle. Follow the in-

structions provided by the system or

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-35

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

refer to “Setup” later in this section

for more information on changing pri-

orities.

7. The system will ask if you would like

to select a custom ring tone

. Follow

the instructions provided by the

system or refer to “Setup” later in this

section for more information on se-

lecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phone

number

1. Push the button on steering

wheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call”

. The system acknowl-

edges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

3. Say the number you wish to call

For example, 555-1212 can be said as

“five five five one two one two.” See

“How to say numbers” earlier in this

section for more information.

4. When you have finished speaking the

phone number, the system repeats it

back and announces the available

commands.

5. Say: “Dial”

. The system acknowl-

edges the command and makes the

call.

For additional command options, see “List

of voice commands” later in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press the

button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the

button on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you

hear the ring tone, press the button

on the steering wheel to reject the call.

For additional command options, see “List

of voice commands” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

When you push and release the but-

ton on the steering wheel, you can

choose from the commands on the Main

Menu. The following pages describe these

commands and the commands in each

sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of

commands currently available anytime the

system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without com-

pleting it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit”

at anytime the system is waiting for a re-

sponse. The system will end the VR ses-

sion. Whenever the VR session is can-

celled, a double beep is played to indi-

cate you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or “Cor-

4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

rection” anytime the system is waiting for

a response.

When you get used to the menus in the

system, you can talk ahead by saying

more than one command at a time. For

example, say, “Call five five five one two

one two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-

sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone

by pressing the button on the steer-

ing wheel. However, if you press the

button when the system is waiting

for a response from you it will end the VR

session.

“Call”

Name (speak name)

If you have stored entries in the Phone

Book, you can dial a number associated

with a name and location.

See “Phone book” later in this section to

learn how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the

name of the phone book entry you wish to

call. The system acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated

with the name, the system asks you to

choose the location.

Once you have confirmed the name and

location, the system begins the call.

Number (speak digits)

When prompted by the system, say the

number you wish to call. Refer to “How to

say numbers” and “Making a call by en-

tering a phone number” earlier in this

section for more details.

“Redial”

Use the Redial command to call the last

number that was dialed within the ve-

hicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last number

dialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command,

repeats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the sys-

tem announces, “There is no number to

redial” and ends the VR session.

“Call back”

Use the Call Back command to dial the

number of the last incoming call within

the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command,

repeats the number and begins dialing. If

a call back number does not exist, the

system announces, “There is no number

to call back” and ends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command

options available. Press the button

on the steering wheel to mute the receiv-

ing voice and enter commands.

O“Help” — The system announces the

available commands.

O“Go back/Correction” — The system

announces “Go back,” ends the VR

session and returns to the call.

O“Cancel/Quit” — The system an-

nounces “Cancel,” ends the VR ses-

sion and returns to the call.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-37

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

O“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the

Send command to enter numbers dur-

ing a call. For example, if you were di-

rected to dial an extension by an auto-

mated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the com-

mand and sends the tones associated

with the numbers. The system then

ends the VR session and returns to

the call.

O“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call

command to transfer the call from the

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System

to the cellular phone when privacy is

desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call.

Call transferred to privacy mode.” The

system then ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call

command again to return to a hands-

free call through the vehicle.

O“Mute” — Use the Mute command to

mute your voice so the other party

cannot hear it. Use the mute command

again to unmute your voice.

NOTE:

If the other party ends the call or the cellu-

lar phone network connection is lost while

the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature

may need to be reset to “off.”

“Phone book”

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for

each phone paired with the system. Each

name can have up to 4 locations/phone

numbers associated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“New entry”

Use the New Entry command to store a

new name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the

name you would like to give the new

entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for a

name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a

name already stored, the system tells

you, then prompts you for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and

you confirm it is correct, the system asks

for a location (Home, Office, Mobile or

Other).

For example, say: “Home.”

The system acknowledges the location

and asks for a number.

For example, say: “five five five one

two one two.” See “How to say num-

bers” earlier in this section for more

information.

The system repeats the number and

prompts you for the next command. When

you have finished entering numbers,

choose “Store.”

4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The system confirms the name, location

and number. The system then asks if you

would like to store another location for

the same name. If you do not wish to

store another location, the system ends

the VR session.

“Edit”

Use the Edit command to alter an existing

phone book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or

4th phone number to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the

name of the entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and

asks you for the location you would like

to edit.

Say the name of the location. The system

acknowledges and asks you for the phone

number you would like to store with this

location.

See “How to say numbers” earlier in this

section for more information.

The system repeats the number and

prompts you for the next command. When

you have finished entering numbers,

choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location

and number, then announces that the en-

try has been stored. The system then

ends the VR session.

“Delete”

Use the Delete command to erase one en-

try from the phone book, all entries from

the phone book, the current redial

number or the current call back number.

To delete entries from the phone book,

say a name or “All entries” when

prompted by the system.

The system acknowledges the command

and asks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call

back number, say “redial number” or “call

back number” when prompted by the sys-

tem.

If a redial number or a call back number

exists, the system deletes them without

asking for confirmation.

If there is no number for the entry you are

trying to delete, the system says so and

ends the VR session.

“List names”

Use the List Names command to hear all

the names and locations in the phone

book.

The system recites the phone book en-

tries but does not include the actual

phone numbers. When the playback of

the list is complete the system ends the

VR session.

You can stop the playback of the list at

any time by pressing the button on

the steering wheel. The system ends the

VR session.

“Memo pad”

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 3

voice memos, each up to 20 seconds

long.

“Play”

The system plays back all the memos in

the order of newest to oldest. The system

ends the VR session.

If there are no memos recorded, the

system announces “No messages to

play.” The system ends the VR session.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-39

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

“Record”

The system announces “Recording” and a

tone sounds signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record

clearly. When you are done, press the

or button on the steering

wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces

“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds

to end the VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if

you wish to record over the oldest memo.

“Delete”

The Delete command erases all memos.

The system asks you to confirm this ac-

tion before deleting all memos.

“Setup”

Use the Setup command to change op-

tions associated with the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System.

“Pair phone”

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a

phone to the Bluetooth Hands-Free

Phone System.

When you are asked to enter a PIN code for

pairing your Bluetooth cellular phone, op-

erate it to enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless of

the number of phones paired.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to

pair a sixth phone, the system announces

that you must first delete one phone or

replace an existing phone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already

been paired to your vehicle’s system, the

system announces the name the phone is

already using. The pairing procedure will

then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose

from the following commands:

O“New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a

phone” earlier in this section.

O“Replace phone” — The system an-

nounces the names of the phones al-

ready paired and asks which you

would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone

you wish to replace, the paring proce-

dure will begin. Refer to “Pairing pro-

cedure” earlier in this section.

O“List phone” — See the description

below.

“List phones”

Use the List Phone command to hear the

names of the phones currently paired. If

no phones are paired, the system an-

nounces, “No paired phones to list.” The

system then ends the VR session.

4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

“Select phone”

Use the Select Phone command to select

a phone of lesser priority when two or

more phones paired with Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System are in the ve-

hicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone

and confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the se-

lected phone remains active until the igni-

tion switch is turned OFF or you select a

new phone.

“Change priority”

Use the Change Priority command to

change the priority level of the active

phone.

The priority level determines which phone

is active when more than one paired

Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the

active phone and asks for a new priority

level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being

used for another phone, the two phones

will swap priority levels.

For example, if the current priority levels

are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone A

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone

C to Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone”

Use the Delete Phone command to delete

a specific phone or all phones from the

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the

phones already paired with the system and

their priority level. The system then gives

you the option to delete a specific phone,

all phones or listen to the list again.

Once you chose to delete a phone or all

phones, the system asks you to confirm

this action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associated

phone book for that phone will also be de-

leted.

“Select ringtone”

Use the Select Ringtone command to se-

lect the tone heard in the vehicle when an

incoming call is received.

The system announces the name of the

active phone and asks you to choose from

the following commands:

O“Ringtone” — The system plays a ring-

tone and asks if you would like to se-

lect that tone. If you say no, the

system plays the next ringtone avail-

able and continues to cycle through

the ringtones until you select one or

quit.

O“Silent” — The system asks you to

confirm your wish to disable the ring-

tone.

“Bluetooth off”

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn

off the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem.

When Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone

System is off, you will not be able to

make or receive calls using INFINITI Voice

Recognition. Also, you will not have ac-

cess to the Phone Book.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-41

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

You can still use the Memo Pad and ac-

cess Setup.

To turn on the system again, choose the

Bluetooth On command from the Setup

command.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of

dialect users to train the system to improve

recognition accuracy. By repeating a

number of commands, the users can create

a voice model of their own voice that is

stored in the system. The system is ca-

pable of storing a different speaker adapta-

tion model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will

use memory A to store the model. If

memory A is in use and memory B is

available, the system will use memory B

to store the model. If both of the memory

locations are in use, the system will ask

the user to select which memory location

should be overwritten.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as

follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably

quiet outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine

running, the parking brake on, and the

transmission in Park.

3. Press and hold the button for

more than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the

hands-free phone system to enter the

speaker adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END ( ) button to select a

different language.”

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a dif-

ferent language, see “Choosing a lan-

guage” earlier in this section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is se-

lected automatically. If both memory

locations are already in use, the

system will prompt you to overwrite

one. Follow the instructions provided

by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you

are ready to begin, the press the

button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow

the instructions provided by the

system.

9. When training is finished, the system

will tell you an adequate number of

phrases have been recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your

name. Follow the instructions to regis-

ter your name.

11. The system will announce that

speaker adaptation has been com-

pleted and the system is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

OThe button is pressed for more

than 5 seconds in SA mode.

OThe vehicle is driven during SA mode.

OThe ignition switch is turned to the

OFF or LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs

you to say the following phrases.

(The system will prompt you for each

phrase.)

Ophone book new entry

Odial three oh four two nine

Odelete call back number

Osetup pair phone

4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X

Omemo pad play

Oeight pause nine three two pause

seven

Odelete all entries

Ocall seven two four zero nine

Ophone book delete entry

Omemo pad record

Odial star two one seven oh

OYes

ONo

Oselect ring tone

Odial eight five six nine two

OBluetooth on

Osetup change priority

Ocall three one nine oh two

Onine seven pause pause three oh eight

OCancel

Ocall back number

Ocall star two zero nine five

Odelete phone

Odial eight three zero five one

OHome

Ofour three pause two nine pause zero

Odelete redial number

Ophone book list names

Ocall eight oh five four one

OCorrection

Osetup change ring tone

Odial seven four oh one eight

Osetup main menu

ODelete

Odial nine seven two six six

Omemo pad delete

Ocall seven six three oh one

Ogo back

Ocall five six two eight zero

Odial six six four three seven

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-43

w06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solu-

tions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command cor-

rectly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the ve-

hicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is

too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to

improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong en-

try from the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed

by using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X

Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving.............. 5-2

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................. 5-2

Three way catalyst....................................... 5-3

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover..................... 5-5

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ............. 5-5

All-wheel drive (AWD) driving safety

precautions (for AWD models) .................... 5-6

Ignition switch (except Intelligent Key

system)............................................................. 5-6

Automatic transmission............................... 5-6

Manual transmission .................................. 5-7

Key positions .............................................. 5-8

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System............ 5-8

Ignition switch (models with the Intelligent

Key system)...................................................... 5-9

Ignition switch positions ............................. 5-9

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .......... 5-10

Before starting the engine............................... 5-10

Starting the engine.......................................... 5-11

Driving the vehicle .......................................... 5-12

Automatic transmission.............................. 5-12

Manual transmission ................................ 5-16

Parking brake.................................................. 5-19

Cruise control ................................................. 5-20

Precautions on cruise control .................... 5-20

Cruise control operations .......................... 5-20

Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-22

Increasing fuel economy ................................. 5-22

All-wheel drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ............ 5-23

All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light........... 5-23

Parking/parking on hills ................................. 5-24

Power steering................................................ 5-25

Brake system.................................................. 5-26

Braking precautions .................................. 5-26

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)..................... 5-26

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .......... 5-28

Rear active steer (RAS) system (if so

equipped) ....................................................... 5-29

Cold weather driving....................................... 5-30

Freeing a frozen door lock......................... 5-30

Anti-freeze................................................. 5-30

Battery ...................................................... 5-30

Draining of coolant water .......................... 5-30

Tire equipment .......................................... 5-30

Special winter equipment........................... 5-31

Driving on snow or ice ............................... 5-31

Engine block heater (if so equipped) ......... 5-32

w06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Do not leave children, impaired adults, or

pets alone in your vehicle. They could ac-

cidentally injure themselves or others

through inadvertent operation of the ve-

hicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, tempera-

tures in a closed vehicle could quickly be-

come high enough to cause severe or pos-

sibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

OClosely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain

colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.

Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause

unconsciousness or death.

OIf you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle in-

spected immediately.

ODo not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

ODo not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

OKeep the trunk lid closed while driving,

otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn

into the passenger compartment. If you

must drive with the trunk lid open, follow

these precautions:

— Open all the windows.

— Set the air recirculation switch OFF

and the fan control at high to circu-

late the air.

OIf electrical wiring or other cable connec-

tions must pass to a trailer through the

seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow

the manufacturer’s recommendation

to prevent carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle.

OIf a special body, camper, or other equip-

ment is added for recreational or other

usage, follow the manufacturer’s recom-

mendation to prevent carbon monoxide

entry into the vehicle. (Some recre-

ational vehicle appliances such as

stoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. may

also generate carbon monoxide.)

OThe exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic when-

ever:

— Your vehicle is raised while being ser-

viced.

— You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger compart-

ment.

— You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

— You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission con-

trol device installed in the exhaust

system. Exhaust gas in the converter is

burned at high temperatures to help re-

duce pollutants.

WARNING

OThe exhaust gas and the exhaust system

are very hot. Keep people, animals or

flammable materials away from the ex-

haust system components.

ODo not stop or park the vehicle over flam-

mable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite and

cause a fire.

CAUTION

ODo not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to

help reduce exhaust pollutants.

OKeep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if no-

ticeable loss of performance or other un-

usual operating conditions are detected.

Have the vehicle inspected promptly by

an INFINITI dealer.

OAvoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause the

engine to misfire, damaging the

three-way catalyst.

ODo not race the engine while warming it

up.

ODo not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-

bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illumi-

nates a low tire pressure telltale when

one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low

tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon

as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-

inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and

tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s

handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is

the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-

rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation

has not reached the level to trigger illumi-

nation of the TPMS low tire pressure tell-

tale.

Starting and driving 5-3

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illu-

minated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists. When the malfunction

indicator is illuminated, the system may not

be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur

for a variety of reasons, including the in-

stallation of replacement or alternate tires

or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after

replacing one or more tires or wheels on

your vehicle to ensure that the replacement

or alternate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function properly.

Additional information

OThe TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

The TPMS will activate only when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

OTire pressure rises and falls de-

pending on the heat caused by the ve-

hicle’s operation and the outside tem-

perature. Low outside temperature can

lower the temperature of the air inside

the tire which can cause a lower tire

inflation pressure. This may cause the

low tire pressure warning light to illu-

minate. If the warning light illuminates

in low ambient temperature, check the

tire pressure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire

pressure warning light” in the “2. Instru-

ments and controls” section and “Tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in

the “6. In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates while driving, avoid sudden steering

maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce ve-

hicle speed, pull off the road to a safe loca-

tion and stop the vehicle as soon as pos-

sible. Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the

tire pressure to the recommended COLD

tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “6.

In case of emergency” section for changing

a flat tire.)

OWhen a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-

cated, the TPMS will not function and the

low tire pressure warning light will flash.

Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or sys-

tem resetting.

OReplacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

ODo not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

5-4 Starting and driving

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This

may cause poor reception of the signals from

the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will

not function properly.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner may result in loss of control

or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-

sive speed, high speed cornering, or sud-

den steering maneuvers. These driving

practices could cause you to lose control

of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss

of control could result in a collision with

other vehicles or objects, or cause the ve-

hicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of

control causes the vehicle to slide side-

ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid

driving when tired. Never drive under the

influence of alcohol or drugs (including

prescription or over-the-counter drugs

which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt as outlined in the “1.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system” section and also

instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover

crash, an unbelted or improperly belted

person is significantly more likely to be in-

jured or killed than a person properly

wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or

drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces

coordination, delays reaction time and im-

pairs judgement. Driving after drinking alco-

hol increases the likelihood of being in-

volved in an accident injuring yourself and

others. Additionally, if you are injured in an

accident, alcohol can increase the severity of

the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. You

must not drive under the influence of al-

cohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol related acci-

dents. Although the local laws vary on

what is considered to be legally intoxi-

cated, the fact is that alcohol affects all

people differently and most people under-

estimate the effects of alcohol.

Starting and driving 5-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Remember, drinking and driving don’t

mix!

And that’s true for drugs too (over the

counter, prescription, and illegal drugs).

Don’t drive if your ability to operate your

vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or

some other physical condition.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) DRIVING

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (for AWD

models)

WARNING

ODo not drive beyond the performance ca-

pability of the tires, even with AWD en-

gaged. Accelerating quickly, sharp

steering maneuvers or sudden braking

may cause loss of control.

OAlways use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Install tire chains on the rear

wheels when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

OThis vehicle is not designed for off-road

(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy

or muddy roads that tires may get stuck

in.

ODo not place an AWD equipped vehicle

on a two wheel dynamometer or raise

two wheels off the ground and shift the

transmission to any D (drive) or R (re-

verse) position. Doing so may result in

transmission damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in se-

rious vehicle damage or personal injury.

ONever operate the accelerator pedal with

any wheels raised and the other wheels

on the ground while jacking up or with

any wheels on a roller and the other

wheels on the ground. Otherwise, the

vehicle could lurch forward or backward.

OWhen a wheel is off the ground due to an

unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel

excessively.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The ignition lock is designed so the key

cannot be turned to the LOCK position

and removed until the selector lever is

moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition

switch, make sure the selector lever is in

the P (Park) position.

If the selector lever is not returned to the

P (Park) position, the key cannot be

moved to the LOCK position.

SSD0392

IGNITION SWITCH (except Intelligent Key

system)

5-6 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

When the key cannot be turned toward

the LOCK position, proceed as follows to

remove the key:

1. Move the selector lever into the P po-

sition.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward

the ON direction.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

If the key is removed from the ignition

switch, the selector lever cannot be

moved from the P position. The selector

lever can be moved if the ignition switch is

in the ON position and the foot brake pedal

is depressed.

There is an OFF position

in between

the LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF po-

sition is indicated by a “1” on the key cyl-

inder. When the ignition switch is in the

OFF position, the steering wheel is not

locked.

In order to lock the steering wheel, it

must be turned about 1/6 of a turn coun-

terclockwise from the straight up posi-

tion.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key.

To unlock the steering wheel, insert the

key and turn it gently while rotating the

steering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK po-

sition while driving. The steering wheel will

lock. This may cause the driver to lose con-

trol of the vehicle and could result in serious

vehicle damage or personal injury.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The ignition switch includes a device that

helps prevent accidental removal of the

key while driving.

The key can only be removed when the ig-

nition switch is in the LOCK position.

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position from the ACC or ON position, turn

the key to the OFF position, push the key

in, then turn the key to the LOCK position.

There is an OFF position

in between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position

is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

SSD0503

Starting and driving 5-7

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

In order for the steering wheel to be

locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a

turn clockwise from the straight up posi-

tion.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key.

To unlock the steering wheel, insert the

key and turn it gently while rotating the

steering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK po-

sition while driving. The steering wheel will

lock. This may cause the driver to lose con-

trol of the vehicle and could result in serious

vehicle damage and/or personal injury.

KEY POSITIONS

The ignition switch includes an anti-theft

steering lock device.

LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)

The ignition key can only be removed

when the ignition switch is in this posi-

tion.

OFF (1)

The engine can be turned off without

locking the steering wheel.

The ignition lock is designed so that the

key cannot be turned to the LOCK position

and removed until the selector lever is

moved to the P position (for automatic

transmission) or the key is pushed in

while turning the key between the ACC

and LOCK positions.

ACC (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) (3)

This position activates ignition system in

addition to electrical accessories.

START (4)

This position activates the starter motor,

starting the engine.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a regis-

tered key (for example, when interference

is caused by another registered key, an

automated toll road device or automated

payment device on the key ring), restart

the engine using the following proce-

dures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) away from the registered

key.

If this procedure allows the engine to

start, INFINITI recommends placing the

registered key on a separate key ring to

avoid interference from other devices.

5-8 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch cannot be turned to the

LOCK position and removed until the se-

lector lever is moved to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

When turning the ignition switch, make

sure the selector lever is in the P position.

If the selector lever is not returned to the

P position, the ignition switch cannot be

moved toward the LOCK position.

When the ignition switch cannot be

turned toward the LOCK position, proceed

as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P po-

sition.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the

ON direction.

3. Turn the key toward the LOCK posi-

tion.

The selector lever can be moved from the P

position if the ignition switch is in the ON

position and the foot brake pedal is de-

pressed.

There is an OFF position in between the

LOCK and ACC positions, although it does

not show on the lock cylinder. When the

ignition is in the OFF position the steering

wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be

locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a

turn counterclockwise from the straight

up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the igni-

tion switch to the LOCK position. To unlock

the steering wheel, push the ignition

switch in and turn it gently while rotating

the steering wheel slightly right and left.

If the battery of the vehicle equipped with

the Intelligent Key system is discharged,

the ignition switch cannot be turned from

the LOCK position, even using the me-

chanical key or valet key.

WARNING

Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position while driving. The steering wheel

will lock. This may cause the driver to lose

control of the vehicle and could result in se-

rious vehicle damage and/or personal injury.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

Push in the ignition switch to the

range when you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position):

The ignition switch can only be locked in

the

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when

it is pushed in, and turned to the ACC po-

sition

while carrying the Intelligent

Key.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries such as the radio, when the engine is

not running.

SPA1628

IGNITION SWITCH (models with the

Intelligent Key system)

Starting and driving 5-9

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system

and electrical accessories.

START

This position starts the engine. As soon

as the engine has started, release the

switch immediately. It will automatically

return to the ON position.

For important safety information, see “Ig-

nition switch” in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section.

The ignition switch cannot be turned back

to the LOCK position unless the shift lever

is in P position. (It can be turned to only

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition

switch in ACC or ON position when the en-

gine is not running for an extended period.

This can discharge the battery.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered key.

If the engine does not start using a regis-

tered key (for example, when interference

is caused by another registered key, an

automated toll road device or an auto-

mated payment device on the key ring),

restart the engine using the following pro-

cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If this procedure allows the engine to

start, INFINITI recommends placing the

registered key on a separate key ring to

avoid interference from other devices.

OMake sure the area around the vehicle

is clear.

OMaintenance items should be checked

periodically, for example, each time

you check engine oil.

OCheck that all windows and lights are

clean.

OVisually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires

for proper inflation.

OLock all doors.

OPosition seat and adjust head re-

straints.

OAdjust inside and outside mirrors.

OFasten seat belts and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

OCheck the operation of warning lights

when the ignition key is turned to the

ON position. See “Warning/indicator

lights and audible reminders” in the

“2. Instruments and controls” section.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-10 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the selector lever to the P or N

position. (P preferred.)

The starter is designed so that the

starter does not operate unless the se-

lector lever is in either one of the

above positions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to the N position.

Depress the clutch pedal fully to the

floor.

The starter is designed so that it does

not operate unless the clutch pedal is

fully depressed.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (4)

to crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal. Release the key

when the engine starts.

If the engine starts, but fails to run, re-

peat the above procedure.

OIf the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-

starting, depress the accelerator pedal

a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor)

and while holding, crank the engine.

Release the key and the accelerator

pedal when the engine starts.

OIf the engine is very hard to start be-

cause it is flooded, depress the accel-

erator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to

6 seconds. After cranking the engine,

release the accelerator pedal. Crank

the engine with your foot off the accel-

erator pedal by turning the ignition key

to the START position. Release the key

when the engine starts. If the engine

starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15

seconds at a time. If the engine does not

start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds

before cranking again, otherwise the starter

could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at

moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather. In

cold weather, keep the engine running

for a minimum of2-3minutes before

shutting it off. Starting and stopping

the engine over a short period of time

may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-11

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

5-speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your ve-

hicle is electronically controlled by a

transmission control module to produce

maximum efficiency and smooth opera-

tion.

Shown on the following pages are the rec-

ommended operating procedures for this

transmission. Follow these procedures for

maximum vehicle performance and

driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal and push the selector le-

ver button before shifting the selector

lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D

(Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Be

sure the vehicle is fully stopped before at-

tempting to shift the selector lever.

This automatic transmission model is de-

signed so that the foot brake pedal must

be depressed before shifting from P (Park)

to any drive position while the ignition

switch is the ON position.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of the

other gear positions if the ignition switch

is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position

or if the key is removed from the switch.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and push the selector lever button to

shift into a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot

brake, then gradually start the vehicle

in motion.

WARNING

ODo not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral)

to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual shift

mode. Always depress the brake pedal

until shifting is completed. Failure to do

so could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

OCold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

OOn slippery roads, do not downshift.

This may cause a loss of control.

ONever shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while vehicle is moving forward. Never

shift to P (Park) or D (Drive) while vehicle

is moving rearward. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and have

an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing

the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should

be used for this purpose.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-12 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressing

the brake pedal,

: Push the button,

: Just move the selector lever.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal and shift the selector lever

from the P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neu-

tral), D (Drive), or Manual shift mode posi-

tion.

Push the button to shift into the P (Park)

or R (Reverse) position. All other positions

can be selected without pushing the

button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector lever

is in any position while the engine is not run-

ning. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle

to move unexpectedly or roll away and result

in serious personal injury or property

damage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC po-

sition for any reason while the vehicle is

in the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or any D

(Drive) position, the key cannot be turned

to the LOCK position and be removed

from the ignition switch. Move the se-

lector lever to the P (Park) position, then

the key can be turned to the LOCK posi-

tion.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle

is parked or when starting the engine.

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the selector lever button

pushed in to move the selector lever from

theN(Neutral)positionoranydriveposition

to the P (Park) position. Apply the parking

brake. When parking on a hill, first depress

the foot brake pedal, apply the parking

brake, then move the lever to the P (Park)

position.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be

sure the vehicle is completely stopped be-

fore selecting the R (Reverse) position.

The brake pedal must be depressed and

the selector lever button pushed in to

move the selector lever from the P (Park), N

(Neutral) or any drive position to the R (Re-

verse) position.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to the N (Neutral)

position and restart a stalled engine while

the vehicle is moving.

SSD0413

Starting and driving 5-13

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is shifted from

the D position to the manual shift gate

with the vehicle stopped or while driving,

the transmission enters the manual shift

mode. Shift range can be selected manu-

ally.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range

is displayed on the position indicator in

the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

→

←2

→

←3

→

←4

→

←5

(5th):

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

(4th):

For driving up or down long slopes where

engine braking would be advantageous.

(3rd) and 2

(2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on

downhill grades.

(1st):

Use this position when climbing steep

hills slowly or driving slowly through

deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum

engine braking on steep downhill grades.

ORemember not to drive at high speeds

for extended periods of time in lower

than 4

range. This reduces gas mile-

age.

OWhen shifting up, move the selector

lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to

higher range.)

OWhen shifting down, move the se-

lector lever to the − (down) side.

(Shifts to lower range.)

OMoving the selector lever rapidly to

the same side twice will shift the

ranges in succession.

OWhen canceling the manual shift

mode, return the selector lever to the

D position. The transmission returns

to the normal driving mode.

OIn the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving perfor-

mance and reduces the chance of ve-

hicle damage or loss of control.

In the manual shift mode, the transmission

automatically shifts down to 1st gear be-

fore the vehicle comes to a stop. When ac-

celerating again, it is necessary to shift up

to the desired range.

Accelerator downshift

— In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress

the accelerator pedal to the floor. This

shifts the transmission down into the

lower gear, depending on the vehicle

speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the

automatic transmission will be locked in

the 4th gear.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. This will occur

even if all electrical circuits are functioning

properly. In this case, turn the ignition

5-14 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

switch to the OFF position and wait for 3

seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON

position. The vehicle should return to its

normal operating condition. If it does not

return to its normal operating condition,

have an INFINITI dealer check the trans-

mission and repair if necessary.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,

the selector lever may not be moved from

the P (Park) position even with the brake

pedal depressed and the selector lever

button pushed.

To move the selector lever, release the

shift lock and push the selector lever but-

ton. The selector lever can be moved to

the N (Neutral) position. However, the

steering wheel will be locked unless the

ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-

tion.

To release the shift lock, complete the fol-

lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock cover

using a

suitable tool.

4. Insert a suitable tool in the shift lock

slot, and push down

5. Push the selector lever button

and

move the selector lever to the N (Neu-

tral) position

while holding down

the shift lock.

6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition to unlock the steering wheel.

Now the vehicle may be moved to the

desired location.

If the lever cannot be moved out of the P

(Park) position, have an INFINITI dealer

check the automatic transmission system

as soon as possible.

SSD0477

Starting and driving 5-15

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Shifting

To change gears, or when up shifting or

down shifting, fully depress the clutch

pedal, shift into the appropriate gear,

then slowly and smoothly release the

clutch.

This vehicle is equipped with a short

throw shifter manual transmission. To en-

sure smooth gear changes, fully depress

the clutch pedal before operating the shift

lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully de-

pressed before the transmission is

shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans-

mission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to

2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in se-

quence according to the vehicle speed.

To back up, depress the shift lever and

then move it to the R (Reverse) position

after stopping the vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into

the R (Reverse) or 1 position (Low gear),

shift to the N (Neutral) position, and then

release the clutch pedal once. Fully de-

press the clutch pedal again and shift

into the R or 1 position.

WARNING

ODo not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

ODo not over-rev the engine when shifting

to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of

control or engine damage.

CAUTION

ODo not rest your foot on the clutch pedal

while driving. This may damage the

clutch.

OFully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission

damage.

OStop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

OWhen the vehicle is stopped for a period

of time, for example at a stop light, shift

to N (Neutral) and release the clutch

pedal with the foot brake applied.

SSD0536

5-16 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Up-shift indicator

The manual transmission up-shift indi-

cator is located in the meter and shows

the driver the timing to shift into a higher

gear by illuminating. The use of the up-

shift indicator will help you to upshift at a

constant engine speed (rpm) from any

gear.

The up-shift indicator will start flashing

when the engine speed is within about

500 rpm of the set figure while driving,

and then illuminate after the engine

speed reaches the set figure.

Use the up-shift indicator when driving as

follows:

OIf the maximum engine speed is de-

sired, set the figure at 7,000 rpm. (The

indicator starts flashing from about

6,500 rpm and comes on steady at

7,000 rpm.)

OIf the maximum engine torque is de-

sired, set the figure at 4,800 rpm.

(The indicator starts flashing from

about 4,300 rpm and comes on steady

at 4,800 rpm.)

OIf you want to break in your vehicle,

use of the up-shift indicator with a

rather low figure will help you to avoid

the high engine speed.

To make the up-shift indicator not come

on, set the figure at above 7,900 rpm.

There may be a slight difference between

the timing of the up-shift indicator illumi-

nation and the tachometer indication.

Up-shift indicator setting:

The desired engine speed (rpm) for the

up-shift indicator can be set while the up-

shift indicator setting mode is selected.

Change the display to the up-shift indica-

tor mode by pushing the trip odometer

reset switch

. When the up-shift indica-

tor setting mode is selected, the engine

speed currently set is displayed. (The ini-

tial factory setting is 8,000 rpm.) The fig-

ure can be changed between 2,000 and

8,000 rpm.

SSD0432 SSD0433

Starting and driving 5-17

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Push the trip odometer reset switch more

than approximately 2 seconds and then

the figure in the display will start

blinking.

Pushing the trip odometer reset switch for

less than approximately 1 second while

the figure is blinking will add the figure

by 100 rpm. If pushing for more than ap-

proximately 1 second, the figure will in-

crease by 500 rpm.

If you have not operated the trip odom-

eter reset switch for 5 seconds, the set-

ting mode will end. The display will illumi-

nate instead of blink.

If the battery cable is disconnected, the

set engine speed will be returned to the

initial figure (8,000 rpm).

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle

speeds for shifting into a higher gear.

These suggestions relate to fuel economy

and vehicle performance. Actual up-shift

speeds will vary according to road condi-

tions, the weather and individual driving

habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude ar-

eas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 8 (13)

2nd to 3rd 16 (25)

3rd to 4th 25 (40)

4th to 5th 30 (50)

5th to 6th 33 (53)

For quick acceleration in low altitude

areas or in high altitude areas [over 4,000

ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in

each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is

not running smoothly, or if you need to

accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested

speed (shown below) in any gear. For

level road driving, use the highest gear

suggested for that speed. Always observe

posted speed limits, and drive according

to the road conditions, which will ensure

safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine

when shifting to a lower gear as it may

cause engine damage or loss of vehicle

control.

Gear MPH (km/h)

1st 35 (56)

2nd 60 (96)

3rd 90 (144)

4th —

5th —

6th —

5-18 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Automatic transmission model

To apply: Fully depress the parking brake

pedal

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Depress the parking brake pedal

and the parking brake will be re-

leased.

3. Before driving, be sure the brake

warning light goes out.

Manual transmission model

To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)

position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake

lever slightly, push the button

and

lower the lever completely

4. Before driving, be sure the brake

warning light goes out.

WARNING

OBe sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

ODo not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

ODo not use the gear shift in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure

the parking brake is fully engaged.

ODo not leave children unattended in a ve-

hicle. They could release the parking

brake and cause an accident.

SPA1286E SPA2110

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-19

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving

under the following conditions:

OWhen it is not possible to keep the ve-

hicle at a set speed.

OIn heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

OOn winding or hilly roads.

OOn slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

OIn very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle con-

trol and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do not shift

into N (Neutral) without depressing the

clutch pedal when the cruise control is set.

Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal

and turn the main switch off immediately.

Failure to do so may cause engine damage.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

OIf the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it cancels automatically. The

SET indicator light on the instrument

panel then blinks to warn the driver.

OIf the engine coolant temperature be-

comes excessively high, the cruise

control system will be canceled auto-

matically.

OIf the SET indicator light blinks, turn

the cruise control MAIN switch off and

have the system checked by an

INFINITI dealer.

OThe SET indicator light may blink when

the cruise control MAIN switch is

turned on while pushing the

RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, or

CANCEL switch. To properly set the

cruise control system, perform the fol-

lowing procedures.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

2. SET/COAST switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. MAIN (ONzOFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a

speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144

km/h) without keeping your foot on the

accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN

switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on

the instrument panel will come on.

SSD0428

CRUISE CONTROL

5-20 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

To set at cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the

SET/COAST switch and release it. (The

SET indicator light will come on.) Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your

vehicle will maintain the set speed.

OTo pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release

the pedal, the vehicle will return to

the previously set speed.

OThe vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, drive without the

cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, follow either of

these three methods:

a) Push the CANCEL switch. The SET indi-

cator light will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator

light will go out.

c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the

CRUISE indicator and SET indicator

lights will go out.

OIf you depress the brake pedal while

pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE

switch and reset at the cruising speed,

turn the MAIN switch off once and

then turn it on again.

OThe cruise control will automatically

be cancelled if the vehicle slows down

below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h).

OIf you depress the clutch pedal

(manual transmission), or move the

selector lever to the N (Neutral) posi-

tion (automatic transmission), the

cruise control will be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle reaches the desired speed,

push and release the SET/COAST

switch.

b) Push and hold the RESUME/

ACCELERATE switch. When the vehicle

reaches the speed you desire, release

the switch.

c) Push, then quickly release the

RESUME/ACCELERATE set switch. This

will increase the vehicle speed by

about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle reaches the desired speed,

push the SET/COAST switch and re-

lease it.

b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows down to the desired speed.

c) Push, then quickly release the SET/

COAST switch. This will decrease the

vehicle speed by about 1 MPH (1.6

km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.

The vehicle will resume the last set cruis-

ing speed when the vehicle speed is over

25 MPH (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-21

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and ensure

the future reliability and economy of your

new vehicle. Failure to follow these recom-

mendations may result in shortened engine

life and reduced engine performance.

OAvoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow. Do

not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

ODo not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

OAvoid quick starts.

OAvoid hard braking as much as pos-

sible.

ODo not tow a trailer or haul a heavy

load for the first 500 miles (800 km).

OAccelerate slowly and smoothly. Main-

tain cruising speeds with a constant

accelerator position.

ODrive at moderate speeds on the high-

way. Driving at high speed will lower

fuel economy.

OAvoid unnecessary stopping and brak-

ing. Maintain a safe distance behind

other vehicles.

OUse a proper gear range which suits

road conditions. On level roads, shift

into high gear as soon as possible.

OAvoid unnecessary engine idling.

OKeep your engine tuned up.

OFollow the recommended periodic

maintenance schedule.

OKeep the tires inflated at the correct

pressure. Low pressure will increase

tire wear and waste fuel.

OKeep the front wheels in correct align-

ment. Improper alignment will cause

not only tire wear but also lower fuel

economy.

OAir conditioner operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only

when necessary.

OWhen cruising at highway speeds, it is

more economical to use the air condi-

tioner and leave the windows closed

to reduce drag.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

5-22 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The full-time all-wheel drive (AWD) system

automatically changes the driving mode.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) WARNING

LIGHT

The AWD warning light is located on the

instrument panel.

The AWD warning light comes on when

the ignition switch is turned to the ON po-

sition. It turns off soon after the engine is

started.

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD sys-

tem while the engine is running, the

warning light will come on.

The warning light may blink rapidly (about

twice per second) while trying to free a

stuck vehicle due to high power train oil

temperature. The driving mode may

change to 2 wheel drive. If the warning

light blinks rapidly during operation, stop

the vehicle with the engine idling in a

safe place immediately. Then if the light

goes off after a while, you can continue

driving.

A large difference between the diameters

of front and rear wheels will make the

warning light blink slowly (about once per

two seconds). Pull off the road in a safe

area, and idle the engine. Check that all

tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is

correct and tires are not worn.

If the warning light is blinking after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped vehicle

with two wheels on a two wheel dynamometer

and the other two wheels raised. Doing so may

result in transmission damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result in serious

vehicle damage or personal injury.

CAUTION

ODo not operate the engine on a free roller

when any of the wheels are raised.

OIf the warning light comes on while

driving there may be a malfunction in the

AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed

and have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

ONever drive on dry hard surface roads in

the SNOW mode, as this will over load

the power train and may cause a serious

malfunction.

SSD0336A

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-23

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OIf the warning light remains on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as

possible.

OThe power train may be damaged if you

continue driving with the warning light

blinking rapidly.

WARNING

ODo not stop or park the vehicle over flam-

mable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite and

cause a fire.

ONever leave the engine running while the

vehicle is unattended.

ONever leave children unattended inside

the vehicle.

OSafe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park).

Failure to do so could cause the vehicle

to move unexpectedly or roll away and

result in an accident.

OMake sure the shift lever has been

pushed as far forward as it can go and

cannot be moved without depressing the

button at the end of the lever.

SD1006MA

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-24 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)

position. When parking on an uphill

grade, place the shift lever in the 1

(Low gear) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from

rolling into the street when parked on

a sloping drive way, it is a good prac-

tice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

OHEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

OHEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

OHEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB:

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away

from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the key.

The power assisted steering uses a hy-

draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-

sist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt

breaks, you will still have control of the

vehicle. However, much greater steering

effort is needed, especially in sharp turns

or at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off

while driving, the power assist for the steer-

ing will not work. Steering will be much

harder to operate.

POWER STEERING

Starting and driving 5-25

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hy-

draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunc-

tions, you will still have braking ability at

two wheels.

Vacuum assisted brake

The brake booster aids braking by using

engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you

can stop the vehicle by depressing the

brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-

sure on the brake pedal will be required

to stop the vehicle and the stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet.

As a result, your braking distance will be

longer and the vehicle may pull to one

side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly tapping the brake

pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until

the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the

brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes when-

ever the stopping effect of the parking

brake is weakened or whenever the park-

ing brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are

replaced, in order to assure the best

braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual and can be performed by

your INFINITI dealer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will cause overheating

of the brakes, increases wear on the

brakes and pads, and reduces gas

mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent

the brakes from overheating, reduce

speed and downshift to a lower gear be-

fore going down a slope or long grade.

Overheated brakes may reduce braking

performance and could result in loss of

vehicle control.

WARNING

OWhile driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

OIf the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for the

brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) controls

the brakes so the wheels will not lock when

braking abruptly or when braking on slip-

pery surfaces. The system detects the rota-

tion speed at each wheel and varies the

brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel

from locking and sliding. By preventing

wheel lockup, the system helps the driver

maintain steering control and helps to mini-

mize swerving and spinning on slippery sur-

faces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it

down.

BRAKE SYSTEM

5-26 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may

result in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation

The ABS will not operate at speeds below

3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to stop the ve-

hicle. (The speeds will vary according to

road conditions.) When the anti-lock

system senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator

(under the hood) rapidly applies and re-

leases hydraulic pressure (like pumping

the brakes very quickly). While the actua-

tor is working, you may feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibra-

tion from the actuator under the hood.

This is normal and indicates that the ABS

is working properly. However, the ABS op-

eration may indicate that road conditions

are hazardous and extra care is required

while driving.

Self-test feature

The anti-lock brake system consists of

electronic sensors, electric pumps, and

hydraulic solenoids controlled by a com-

puter. The computer has a built-in diag-

nostic feature that tests the system each

time you start the engine and move the

vehicle at a low speed in forward or re-

verse. When the self-test occurs, you may

hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and is

not an indication of any malfunction. If

the computer senses any malfunction, it

switches the ABS off and turns on the

ABS warning light in the instrument

panel. The brake system operates nor-

mally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the light comes on during the self-test

or while driving, take the vehicle to an

INFINITI dealer for repair.

WARNING

The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated

device, but it cannot prevent accidents re-

sulting from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain vehicle con-

trol during braking on slippery surfaces, but

remember that the stopping distance on slip-

pery surfaces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with the anti-lock brake

system. Stopping distances may also be

longer on rough, gravel or snow covered

roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in

front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility

for safety of self and others rests in the

hands of the driver.

Tire type and condition of tires may also af-

fect braking effectiveness.

OWhen replacing tires, install the speci-

fied size of tires to the front and rear.

OWhen installing a spare tire, make sure it

is the proper size and type as specified

on the Tire and Loading Information

label. See “Vehicle identification” in the

“9. Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section for the Tire and Loading In-

formation label location.

Starting and driving 5-27

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

When accelerating or driving on a slippery

surface, the tires may spin or slide. With

the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system, sensors detect these movements

and control the braking and engine

output to help improve vehicle stability.

OWhen the VDC system is operating,

the “SLIP” indicator in the instrument

panel blinks.

OWhen only the Traction Control System

(TCS) portion of the VDC system is op-

erating, the “SLIP” indicator in the in-

strument panel blinks.

OIf the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the road

conditions are slippery. Be sure to ad-

just your speed and driving to these

conditions. Be sure to drive carefully.

See “Slip indicator light”, and “Ve-

hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indica-

tor light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

OIndicator light

If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the “SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicator

lights illuminate in the instrument

panel. As long as these indicators are

illuminated, the VDC system function

is canceled.

The VDC system uses an Active Brake Lim-

ited Slip (ABLS) system to improve vehicle

traction. The ABLS system works when

one of the driving wheels is spinning on a

slippery surface. The ABLS system brakes

the spinning wheel which distributes the

driving power to the other driving wheel.

If the vehicle is operated with the VDC

system turned off, all VDC system func-

tions and TCS functions will be turned off.

The ABLS system and ABS will still op-

erate with the VDC system off. When the

ABLS system is activated, the “SLIP” indi-

cator light will blink and you may hear a

clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the

brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

While the VDC system is operating, you

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and

hear a noise or feel a vibration from under

the hood. This is normal and indicates that

the VDC system is working properly.

The VDC system computer has a built in

diagnostic feature that tests the system

each time you start the engine and move

the vehicle forward or backward. When

the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

OThe VDC system is designed to help im-

prove driving stability but does not pre-

vent accidents due to abrupt steering op-

eration at high speeds or due to careless

or dangerous driving. Reduce vehicle

speed and be especially careful when

driving and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

OIf engine related parts such as muffler

are not standard equipment or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” in-

dicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi-

cator lights may illuminate.

ODo not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars

and bushings are not INFINITI-approved

or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC

system may not operate properly. This

could adversely affect vehicle handling

performance, and the “VDC OFF” indi-

cator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi

cator lights may illuminate.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-28 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OIf brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-

dard equipment or are extremely dete-

riorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or

“SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights

may illuminate.

OWhen driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners, the

Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not

operate properly and the “VDC OFF” indi-

cator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi-

cator lights may illuminate. Do not drive

on these types of roads.

OWhen driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP”

indicator or both indicator lights may il-

luminate. This is not a malfunction. Re-

start the engine after driving onto a

stable surface.

OIf wheels or tires other than those rec-

ommended are used, the VDC system

may not operate properly and the “VDC

OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or

both indicator lights may illuminate.

OThe VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow cov-

ered road.

The Rear Active Steer (RAS) system is an

electronically controlled four-wheel

steering system.

The angle of the rear wheels are adjusted

by the RAS system, depending on the ve-

hicle speed and steering angle. The rear

wheels are designed to turn momentarily

in the opposite direction and then change

to the same direction as the front wheels.

At low speeds, the rear wheels will not

turn and the system functions as a two-

wheel steering system.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

RAS function will stop but the ordinary

two-wheel steering system will operate

normally. The “RAS” warning light will il-

luminate.

If the light illuminates while you are driv-

ing, contact an INFINITI dealer for repair.

REAR ACTIVE STEER (RAS) SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

Starting and driving 5-29

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

The RAS system, although a sophisticated

device, cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. Ultimately the responsibility for

safety of self and others rests in the hands of

the driver. Therefore only through attentive

and careful driving methods can the RAS

system be fully appreciated and safety as-

sured.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

de-icer or glycerin to it through the key

hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the

key before inserting it into the key hole.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),

check antifreeze to assure proper winter

protection. For additional information, see

“Engine cooling system” in the “8. Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, see “Battery”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

antifreeze, drain the cooling system by

opening the drain plug located under the

radiator. Refill before operating the ve-

hicle. See “Engine cooling system” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance

of these tires will be substantially re-

duced in snowy and icy conditions. If

you operate your vehicle on snowy or

icy roads, INFINITI recommends the

use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON

tires on all four wheels. Please consult

an INFINITI dealer for the tire type,

size, speed rating and availability in-

formation.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some provinces and states prohibit

their use. Check local, state and pro-

vincial laws before installing studded

tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires, on wet or dry sur-

faces, may be poorer than that of non-

studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used if desired.

Make sure they are of proper size for

the tires on your vehicle and are in-

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-30 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

stalled according to the chain manu-

facturer’s suggestions. However, some

provinces and states prohibit their

use. Check local state and provincial

laws before installing tire chains. Use

only SAE Class S chains. Class “S”

chains are used on vehicles with re-

stricted tire to vehicle clearance. Ve-

hicles that can use Class “S” chains

are designed to meet the SAE stan-

dard minimum clearances between the

tire and the closest vehicle suspen-

sion or body component required to

accommodate the use of a winter trac-

tion device (tire chains or cables). The

minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tire size.

Other types may damage your vehicle.

Use chain tensioners when recom-

mended by the tire chain manufac-

turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end

links of the tire chain must be secured

or removed to prevent the possibility

of damage to the fenders or under-

body. If possible, avoid fully loading

your vehicle when using tire chains. In

addition, drive at a reduced speed.

Otherwise, your vehicle may be dam-

aged and/or vehicle handling and per-

formance may be adversely affected.

ONever install the tire chains on TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tires.

ODo not use the tire chains on dry roads.

OThe tire chains must be installed only

on the rear wheels and not on the front

wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on paved

roads which are clear of snow. Driving

with chains in such conditions can

cause damage to the various mecha-

nisms of the vehicle due to some over-

stress.

4. For all-wheel drive (AWD):

If you install snow tires, they must

also be the same size, brand, con-

struction and tread pattern on all four

wheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

Oa scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows

and wiper blades.

Oa sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

Oa shovel to dig the vehicle out of

snow-drifts.

Oextra window washer fluid to refill the

reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

OWet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

OWhatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even

more traction.

OAllow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

Starting and driving 5-31

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OAllow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

OWatch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise clear

road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is

seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try

not to brake while on the ice, and avoid

any sudden steering maneuvers.

ODo not use cruise control on slippery

roads.

OSnow can trap dangerous exhaust gases

under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of

the exhaust pipe and from around your

vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

An engine block heater to assist extreme

cold temperature starting is available

through an INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

Do not use your heater with an ungrounded

electrical system or tow-pronged (cheater)

adapters. You can be injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

5-32 Starting and driving

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program........................... 6-2

Flat tire ............................................................ 6-2

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .... 6-2

Changing a flat tire ..................................... 6-2

Jump starting ................................................... 6-8

Push starting .................................................. 6-10

If your vehicle overheats ................................. 6-11

Towing your vehicle ........................................ 6-12

Towing recommended by INFINITI .............. 6-12

Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck

vehicle)...................................................... 6-15

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,

unlimited mileage Roadside Assistance

plan. In the event of a roadside

emergency, Roadside Assistance Service

is available to you. Please refer to your

Warranty Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty &

Roadside assistance information booklet

(Canada) for details. Both the Warranty

Booklet and Roadside Assistance Calling

Card in your Owner’s Literature Portfolio

provide the Toll-Free Number to call for

assistance. Roadside Assistance is

provided 24 hours a day, 365 days a year,

for 4 years from the date sold to give

emergency roadside help, in the event of

mechanical or nonmechanical trouble(s)

such as flat tires, out-of-gas, dead battery,

lost keys, mechanical breakdown,

accident, etc.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the tire pres-

sure monitoring system (TPMS). It monitors

tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

When the low tire pressure warning light is

lit, or flashing continuously one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If

the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn

you of it by the low tire pressure warning

light. This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16

MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer to

“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section and “Tire pressure moni-

toring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.

WARNING

OIf the low tire pressure warning light illu-

minates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to

a safe location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. Serious vehicle

damage could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information label

to turn the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-

cated, the TPMS will not function and the

low tire pressure warning light will flash.

Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

OReplacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire

sealant into the tires, as this may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc-

tions below.

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

w06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Shift the manual trans-

mission into the R (Reverse) position

(automatic transmission into the P

(Park) position).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-

hicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

OMake sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the manual transmission is

shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatic

transmission into P (Park).

ONever change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

ONever change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks

at both the front

and back of the wheel diagonally oppo-

site the flat tire to prevent the vehicle

from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

MCE0001A

In case of emergency 6-3

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools 1 and spare tire 2

from the storage area located inside the

trunk as illustrated.

If spacers are equipped, remove them be-

fore removing the spare tire.

SCE0382B

Sedan — Type A

SCE0563

Sedan — Type B

SCE0383B

Sedan

6-4 In case of emergency

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Jacking up the vehicle and

removing the damaged tire

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

1. Place the jack directly under the

jack-up point as illustrated above so

that top of the jack contacts the ve-

hicle at the jack-up point. Align the

jack head between the two notches in

the front or the rear as shown. Also fit

the groove of the jack head between

the notches as shown.

SCE0424B

Coupe

CE1089-A

Jack-up point

In case of emergency 6-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two

turns by turning counterclockwise with

the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove

the wheel nuts until the tire is off the

ground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire

clears the ground. To lift the vehicle,

securely hold the jack lever and rod

with both hands as shown above. Re-

move the wheel nuts, and then re-

move the tire.

WARNING

ONever get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support it

with safety stands.

OUse only the jack provided with your ve-

hicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

ONever use any other part of the vehicle

for jack support.

ONever jack up the vehicle more than nec-

essary.

ONever use blocks on or under the jack.

ODo not start or run the engine while ve-

hicle is on the jack. This is especially

true for vehicles with limited slip differ-

entials.

ODo not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

SCE0504

6-6 In case of emergency

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed emergency use.

See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

(Coupe models)

When replacing a front tire, make sure

the hole in the spare tire wheel is

aligned with the pin on the brake

rotor.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly until

they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence illus-

trated (

). Lower the

vehicle completely.

WARNING

OIncorrect wheel nuts or improperly tight-

ened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to

become loose or come off. This could

cause an accident.

ODo not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

ORetighten the wheel nuts after the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust the tire pressure to the COLD pres-

sure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked for three

hours or more or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to

the driver side center pillar.

SCE0039

In case of emergency 6-7

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking

equipment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the

trunk floor carpeting over the dam-

aged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

OAlways make sure that the spare tire and

jacking equipment are properly secured

after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident or

sudden stop.

OThe T-type spare tire and small size

spare tire are designed for emergency

use. See “Wheels and tires” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-

able. Please see your Warranty Information

Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card

for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-

ranty Information Booklet (Canada).

To start your engine with a booster bat-

tery, the instructions and precautions

below must be followed.

WARNING

OIf done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also dam-

age your vehicle.

OExplosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

ODo not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corro-

sive sulfuric acid solution which can

cause severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything, imme-

diately flush the contacted area with wa-

ter.

OKeep battery out of the reach of children.

SCE0384B

Sedan

SCE0425A

Coupe

JUMP STARTING

6-8 In case of emergency

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OThe booster battery must be rated at 12

volts. Use of an improperly rated battery

can damage your vehicle.

OWhenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

ODo not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

If needed Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information

Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card

for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-

ranty Information Booklet (Canada).

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failure

to do so could result in damage to the charg-

ing system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-

hicle

, position the two vehicles

and

to bring their batteries into

close proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift

lever to the N (Neutral) position (On

automatic transmission models, move

the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion). Switch off all unnecessary elec-

trical systems (light, heater, air condi-

tioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an

old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the se-

quence as illustrated.

SCE0539A

In case of emergency 6-9

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

OAlways connect positive (+) to positive

(+) and negative (−) to body ground, not

to the battery.

OMake sure jumper cables do not touch

moving parts in the engine compartment

and that the cable clamps do not contact

any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the other vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the other ve-

hicle

at about 2,000 rpm, and start

your engine in the normal manner.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not

start right away, turn the key off and wait 3

to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting your engine, carefully

disconnect the negative cable and

then the positive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).

Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to

cover the vent holes as it may be con-

taminated with corrosive acid.

Do not attempt to start the engine by

pushing.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannot be

push started. Attempting to do so may cause

transmission damage.

If needed Roadside Assistance is avail-

able. Please see your Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.

Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)

or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).

PUSH STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

ODo not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

OTo avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while the

engine is still hot. When the radiator cap

is removed, pressurized hot water will

spurt out, possibly causing serious in-

jury.

ODo not open the hood if steam is coming

out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated

by an extremely high temperature gauge

reading), or if you feel a lack of engine

power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take

the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,

apply the parking brake and move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position

(automatic transmission to the P

(Park) position).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all

the windows, and move the tempera-

ture control to maximum hot and the

fan control to high speed.

If engine overheating is caused by

climbing a long hill on a hot day, run

the engine at a fast idle (approximately

1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge

indication returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from the

radiator before opening the hood. (If

steam or coolant is escaping, turn off

the engine.) Do not open the hood fur-

ther until no steam or coolant can be

seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine,

stand clear to prevent getting burned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is run-

ning. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is

leaking or the cooling fan does not

run, stop the engine.

WARNING

OBe careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or to get caught in, the engine

belts or the engine cooling fan.

OThe engine cooling fan can start at any

time when the coolant temperature is

high.

7. After the engine cools down, check

the coolant level in the reservoir tank

with the engine running. Add coolant

to the reservoir tank if necessary.

Have your vehicle repaired at an

INFINITI dealer.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-

able. Please see your Warranty Information

Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card

for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-

ranty Information Booklet (Canada).

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-11

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro-

vincial in Canada) and local regulations

for towing must be followed. Incorrect

towing equipment could damage your ve-

hicle. Towing instructions are available

from an INFINITI dealer. Local service op-

erators are generally familiar with the ap-

plicable laws and procedures for towing.

To assure proper towing and to prevent

accidental damage to your vehicle,

INFINITI recommends having a service op-

erator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to

have the service operator carefully read

the following precautions.

WARNING

ONever ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

ONever get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

OWhen towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any unit is damaged, dollies must be

used.

OAlways attach safety chains before

towing.

For information about towing your vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to

“Flat towing” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section of this

manual.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-

able. Please see your Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.

Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)

or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

INFINITI

Two-wheel drive (2WD) models

INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (rear) wheels off

SCE0386

Two-wheel drive (2WD) models

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-12 In case of emergency

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

the ground or place the vehicle on a flat

bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

ONever tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward) as this may cause

serious and expensive damage to the

transmission. If it is necessary to tow the

vehicle with the front wheels raised, al-

ways use towing dollies under the rear

wheels.

OWhen towing rear wheel drive models

with the front wheels on the ground or

on towing dollies:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position,

and secure the steering wheel in a

straight ahead position with a rope or

similar device. Never secure the steering

wheel by turning the ignition key to the

LOCK position. This may damage the

steering lock mechanism.

OIf you have to tow manual transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground (if

you do not use towing dollies):

OAlways release the parking brake.

OMove the transmission shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position.

SCE0387A

Automatic transmission (AT) models

In case of emergency 6-13

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OObserve the following restricted towing

speeds and distances for manual trans-

mission models only:

— Speed: Below 60 MPH (95 km/h)

— Distance: Less than 500 miles (800

km)

If the speed or distance must necessarily

be greater, remove the propeller shaft be-

fore towing to prevent damage to the

transmission.

All-wheel drive (AWD) models

INFINITI recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle, or the

vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as il-

lustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow AWD models with any of the

wheels on the ground as this may cause se-

rious and expensive damage to the power

train.

SCE0488

All-wheel drive (AWD) models

6-14 In case of emergency

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a

stuck vehicle)

After removing the front license plate (or

the bumper cover), securely install the re-

covery hook

. (Located with jacking

tools.)

Reinstall the license plate on the lower fit-

ting point.

WARNING

OStand clear of a stuck vehicle.

ODo not spin your tires at high speed. This

could cause them to explode and result

in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle

could also overheat and be damaged.

CAUTION

OTow chains or cables must be attached

only to the vehicle recovery hooks or

main structural members of the vehicle.

Otherwise, the vehicle body will be dam-

aged.

ODo not use the vehicle tie downs to free a

vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.

Never tow a vehicle using the vehicle tie

downs or recovery hooks.

OAlways pull the cable straight out from

the front of the vehicle. Never pull the ve-

hicle at an angle.

OPulling devices should be routed so they

do not touch any part of the suspension,

steering, brake or cooling systems.

OPulling devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use in

vehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow,

mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and be-

hind the vehicle is clear of obstruc-

tions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left

to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

OShift back and forth between R (re-

verse) and D (drive) (automatic trans-

mission models) or 1st (low) and R (re-

verse) (manual transmission models).

OApply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.

SCE0524

In case of emergency 6-15

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

ORelease the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R and D (automatic

transmission models) or 1st and R

(manual transmission models).

ODo not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional

towing service to remove the vehicle.

6-16 In case of emergency

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior .............................................. 7-2

Washing...................................................... 7-2

Waxing........................................................ 7-2

Removing spots........................................... 7-3

Underbody................................................... 7-3

Glass........................................................... 7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels................................ 7-3

Chrome parts .............................................. 7-3

Tire dressing .............................................. 7-3

Cleaning interior............................................... 7-4

Floor mats................................................... 7-4

Seat belts.................................................... 7-5

Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-5

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion ......................................... 7-5

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ..................................................... 7-5

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........ 7-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to care for it

properly.

To protect the paint surfaces, please

wash your vehicle as soon as you can.

OAfter a rainfall to prevent possible

damage from acid rain.

OAfter driving in coastal areas to pre-

vent possible damage from sea salt.

OWhen foreign objects, such as soot,

bird droppings, tree sap, metal par-

ticles, or insects get on the paint sur-

faces.

OWhen dust or mud builds up on the

paint surfaces.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-

hicle inside garage or in covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park

in a shady area or protect the vehicle with

a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet

sponge and plenty of water. Clean the ve-

hicle thoroughly using a mild soap, spe-

cial vehicle soap or general purpose dish-

washing liquid mixed with clean, luke-

warm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

ODo not use strong household soap,

strong chemical detergents, gasoline or

solvents.

ODo not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

OAvoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must

be taken when removing caked-on dirt or

other foreign substances so the paint

surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of

clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt.

Therefore, these areas must be regularly

cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes

in the lower edge of the door are open.

Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash

away road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint

surface by using a damp chamois to dry

the vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a

weathered appearance before re-applying

wax.

An INFINITI dealer can assist you in

choosing the proper product.

OWax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

ODo not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners

that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-

ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-

ish may dull the finish or leave swirl

marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as pos-

sible from the surface of the paint to

avoid lasting damage or staining. Special

cleaning products are available at an

INFINITI dealer or any automotive acces-

sory store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter,

the underbody must be cleaned regularly.

This will prevent dirt and salt from

building up and causing underbody and

suspension corrosion. Before the winter

period and again in the spring, the under-

seal must be checked and, if necessary,

re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is

normal for glass to become coated with a

film after the vehicle is parked in the hot

sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will

easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows, do

not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electrical

conductors, radio antenna elements or rear

window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly, especially during winter

months in areas where road salt is used.

Salt could discolor the wheel if not re-

moved.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a

non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain

the finish.

TIRE DRESSING

INFINITI does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce discol-

oration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is

applied to the tires, it may react with the

coating and form a compound. This com-

pound may come off the tire while driving

and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take

the following precautions:

OUse a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more

easily with an oil-based tire dressing.

OApply a light coat of tire dressing to

help prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-

cult to remove).

OWipe off excess tire dressing using a

dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing

is completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

OAllow the tire dressing to dry as rec-

ommended by tire dressing manufac-

turer.

Appearance and care 7-3

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using

a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush.

Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a

clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap

solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft

bristled cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read

the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Some fabric protectors contain chemicals

that may stain or bleach the seat mate-

rial.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

ONever use gasoline, thinner, or any simi-

lar material.

OSmall dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and should

be removed promptly. Do not use saddle

soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning

fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-

based cleaners as they may damage the

leather’s natural finish.

ONever use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

ODo not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine INFINITI floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. No

matter what mats are used, be sure they

are fitted for your vehicle and are properly

positioned in the footwell to prevent inter-

ference with pedal operation. Mats should

be maintained with regular cleaning and

replaced if they become excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid

(driver’s side only)

This model includes a front floor mat

bracket

to act as a floor mat posi-

tioning aid. INFINITI floor mats have been

specially designed for your vehicle model.

The driver’s side floor mat has a grommet

hole incorporated in it. Simply position

the mat by placing the floor mat bracket

through the floor mat grommet hole while

centering the mat in the floorpan contour.

Periodically check to make certain that

the mats are properly positioned.

SAI0012A

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-

pletely before using them. See “Seat belt

maintenance” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely weaken

the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

OThe accumulation of moisture-

retaining dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

ODamage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle, and should

be removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those

areas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollution

exists and road salt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the

rate of corrosion to those parts which are

not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt

in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road

salt use will accelerate the corrosion pro-

cess. Road salt will also accelerate the

disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

OWash and wax your vehicle often to

keep it clean.

OAlways check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as pos-

sible.

OKeep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

OCheck the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash

with water as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

ONEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris

from the passenger compartment by

washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt

with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

ONever allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor

pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, consult an INFINITI dealer.

7-6 Appearance and care

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements ............................... 8-2

General maintenance........................................ 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance

items .......................................................... 8-3

Maintenance precautions.................................. 8-5

Engine compartment check locations................ 8-7

Engine cooling system ..................................... 8-8

Checking engine coolant level..................... 8-8

Changing engine coolant............................. 8-9

Engine oil ....................................................... 8-10

Checking engine oil level........................... 8-10

Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-11

Automatic transmission fluid........................... 8-13

Power steering fluid........................................ 8-13

Brake and clutch fluid..................................... 8-14

Brake fluid................................................. 8-14

Clutch fluid ............................................... 8-15

Window washer fluid....................................... 8-15

Battery............................................................ 8-16

Jump starting............................................. 8-18

Drive belts ...................................................... 8-19

Spark plugs .................................................... 8-19

Replacing spark plugs............................... 8-20

Air cleaner...................................................... 8-20

Windshield wiper blades................................. 8-21

Cleaning .................................................... 8-21

Replacing .................................................. 8-22

Parking brake and brake pedal....................... 8-23

Checking parking brake............................. 8-23

Checking brake pedal................................ 8-23

Brake booster ........................................... 8-24

Fuses.............................................................. 8-25

Engine compartment.................................. 8-25

Passenger compartment............................ 8-27

Keyfob battery replacement............................ 8-28

Keyfob (except Intelligent Key).................. 8-28

Intelligent Key........................................... 8-29

Lights.............................................................. 8-31

Headlights................................................. 8-33

Exterior and interior lights......................... 8-33

Wheels and tires ............................................ 8-37

Tire pressure ............................................. 8-37

Tire labeling .............................................. 8-41

Types of tires ............................................ 8-43

Tire chains ................................................ 8-44

Changing wheels and tires........................ 8-45

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your new INFINITI has been designed to

have minimum maintenance requirements

with longer service intervals to save you

both time and money. However, some day-

to-day and regular maintenance is essen-

tial to maintain your INFINITI’s fine me-

chanical condition, as well as its emission

and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make

sure that the specified maintenance as

well as the general maintenance are per-

formed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only

one who can ensure that your vehicle re-

ceives the proper maintenance care. You

are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

Scheduled maintenance:

For your convenience, both required and

optional scheduled maintenance items

are described and listed in your “INFINITI

Service and Maintenance Guide”. You

must refer to that guide to ensure that

necessary maintenance is performed on

your INFINITI at regular intervals.

General maintenance:

General maintenance includes those

items which should be checked during

normal day-to-day operation. They are es-

sential for proper vehicle operation. It is

your responsibility to perform these main-

tenance procedures regularly as pre-

scribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and

only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by you, a qualified technician, or, if you

prefer, an INFINITI dealer.

Where to go for service:

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced by an

INFINITI dealer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information through tech-

nical bulletins, service tips, and in-

dealership information systems. They are

completely qualified to work on INFINITI

vehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that an INFINITI

dealer’s service department performs the

best job to meet the maintenance

requirements on your vehicle — in a

reliable and economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should

be performed regularly as prescribed in

this section. If you detect any unusual

sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to

check for the cause or have an INFINITI

dealer perform it promptly. In addition,

you should notify an INFINITI dealer if you

think the repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-

nance precautions” later in this section.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found later in this sec-

tion.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all

doors and the engine hood operate prop-

erly. Also ensure that all latches lock se-

curely. Lubricate hinges and latches if

necessary. Make sure that the secondary

latch keeps the hood from opening when

the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights,

stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights,

and other lights are all operating properly

and installed securely. Also check head-

light aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts): When

checking the tires, make sure no wheel

nuts are missing, and check for any loose

wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in

all tires, including the spare, to the speci-

fied pressure. Check carefully for damage,

cuts or excessive wear.

Tire rotation*:

Sedan: The tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km) to minimize tire

wear variation.

Coupe: The tires cannot be rotated.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the

vehicle should pull to either side while

driving on a straight and level road, or if

you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,

there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing

may be needed.

OFor additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at

least every six months for cracks or other

damage. Have a damaged windshield re-

paired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe prop-

erly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing periodic maintenance,

cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not catch or require uneven

effort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-

nism: On a fairly steep hill check that your

vehicle is held securely with the selector

lever in the P (Park) position without ap-

plying any brakes.

Brake pedal*: Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure it has the proper

distance under it when depressed fully.

Check the brake booster function. Be sure

to keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake*: Check that the pedal/

lever has the proper travel and confirm

that your vehicle is held securely on a

fairly steep hill with only the parking

brake applied.

Seats: Check seat position controls such

as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc.

to ensure they operate smoothly and that

all latches lock securely in every position.

Check that the head restraints move up

and down smoothly and that the locks (if

so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (For example, buckles, an-

chors, adjusters and retractors) operate

properly and smoothly, and are installed

securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,

fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive

free play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure

that all warning lights and chimes are op-

erating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets prop-

erly and in sufficient quantity when oper-

ating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly

and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (For example,

each time you check the engine oil or re-

fuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each

cell. It should be between the MAX and

MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high tem-

peratures or under severe conditions re-

quire frequent checks of the battery fluid

level.

Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make sure

that the brake and clutch fluid levels are

between the MAX and MIN lines on the

reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no

belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level location

and turning off the engine. (Wait at least

10 minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.)

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the

sound of the exhaust seems unusual or

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

there is a smell of exhaust fumes, imme-

diately locate the trouble and correct it.

See “Precautions when starting and

driving” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section for exhaust gas (Carbon mon-

oxide).

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after

the vehicle has been parked for a while.

Water dripping from the air conditioner

after use is normal. If you should notice

any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evi-

dent, check for the cause and have it cor-

rected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:

Check the level when the fluid is cold and

the engine is turned off. Check the lines

for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks, de-

formation, deterioration or loose connec-

tions.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control

dust. It is very important to remove these

substances, otherwise rust will form on

the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and

around the exhaust system. At the end of

winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, being

careful to clean those areas where mud

and dirt may accumulate. For additional

information, see “Cleaning exterior” in

the “7. Appearance and care” section.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that

there is adequate fluid in the tank.

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury

to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The

following are general precautions which

should be closely observed.

WARNING

OPark the vehicle on a level surface, apply

the parking brake securely and block the

wheels to prevent the vehicle from

moving. For a manual transmission,

move the shift lever to N (Neutral) posi-

tion. For an automatic transmission

models, move the selector lever to P

(Park).

OBe sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

OIf you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

OIt is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

such as rings, watches, etc. before work-

ing on your vehicle.

OAlways wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

OIf you must run the engine in an enclosed

space such as a garage, be sure there is

proper ventilation for exhaust gases to

escape.

ONever get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support it

with safety stands.

OKeep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and bat-

tery.

OOn gasoline engine models with the Mul-

tiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, the

fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced

by an INFINITI dealer because the fuel

lines are under high pressure even when

the engine is off.

CAUTION

ODo not work under the hood while the en-

gine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait

until it cools down.

ONever connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

ONever leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component har-

ness connector disconnected while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

OAvoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil,

engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section gives instructions regarding only

those items which are relatively easy for

an owner to perform.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also

available. See “Owner’s Manual/Service

Manual order information” in the “9.

Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion.

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in oper-

ating difficulties or excessive emissions,

and could affect your warranty coverage.

If in doubt about any servicing, have it

done by an INFINITI dealer.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Fuse/fusible link holder

2. Battery

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (MT models)

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Window washer fluid reservoir

9. Radiator filler cap

10. Drive belts

11. Engine oil dipstick

12. Air cleaner

SSI0160

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a high-quality, year-round,

anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-

freeze solution contains rust and corro-

sion inhibitors, therefore additional

cooling system additives are not neces-

sary.

WARNING

ONever remove the radiator or coolant res-

ervoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait

until the engine and radiator cool down.

Serious burns could be caused by high

pressure fluid escaping from the ra-

diator. See precautions in “If your ve-

hicle overheats” found in the “6. In case

of emergency” section.

OThe radiator is equipped with a pressure

type radiator cap. To prevent engine

damage, use only a genuine NISSAN ra-

diator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to

use only a Genuine Nissan Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the

proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and

50% demineralized water/distilled water.

The use of other types of engine coolant may

damage your engine cooling system.

Outside temperature

down to Antifreeze

Deminer-

alized

water/

distilled

water

°C °F

−35 −30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

tank when the engine is cold. If the cool-

ant level is below the MIN level

, open

the cap and add coolant up to the MAX

level

. If the reservoir tank is empty,

check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-

cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radia-

tor with coolant up to the filler opening

and also add it to the reservoir tank up to

the MAX level

SDI1385B

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked by an INFINITI

dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be

performed by an INFINITI dealer. The

service procedures can be found in the

appropriate INFINITI Service Manual.

OImproper servicing can result in re-

duced heater performance and engine

overheating.

WARNING

OTo avoid being scalded, never change

the coolant when the engine is hot.

ONever remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escaping

from the radiator.

OAvoid direct skin contact with used cool-

ant. If skin contact is made, wash thor-

oughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

OKeep coolant out of reach of children and

pets.

1. Open radiator drain plug

at the

bottom of radiator, and remove ra-

diator filler cap

OBe careful not to allow coolant to con-

tact drive belts.

OWaste coolant must be disposed of

properly. Check your local regulations.

SDI0114B

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Close the radiator drain plug securely

after the coolant is drained.

3. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper

mixture of antifreeze solution and

demineralized water/distilled water.

Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX

level. Then install the radiator filler

cap.

4. Start the engine and warm it up until

it reaches normal operating tempera-

ture. Then race the engine 2 or 3 times

under no load. Watch the engine cool-

ant temperature gauge for signs of

overheating.

5. Stop the engine. After it completely

cools down, refill the radiator up to

the filler opening. Fill the reservoir

tank up to the MAX level. Check the

drain plug for any sign of leakage.

6. Check the coolant level again after

driving the vehicle.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-

ing temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick

and wipe it

clean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check

the oil level. It should be between the

H and L marks

. If the oil level is

below the L mark

, remove the oil

filler cap and pour recommended oil

through the opening. Do not overfill

6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the break-

in period, depending on the severity of op-

erating conditions.

SDI1386D SDI1781

ENGINE OIL

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Oper-

ating the engine with an insufficient amount

of oil can damage the engine, and such dam-

age is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

Change the engine oil and filter according

to the maintenance intervals shown in the

INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-

ing temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more

than 10 minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a

suitable floor jack and safety jack

stands.

OPlace the safety jack stands under

the vehicle jack-up points.

OA suitable adapter should be at-

tached to the jack stand saddle.

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

a. Remove the small plastic clip at the

center point of the undercover.

b. Then remove the other bolts that

hold the undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and support

points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the

drain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug

with a

wrench and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine

oil is hot.

SDI1520B

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OWaste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

OCheck your local regulations.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench

. Remove the oil filter by

turning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting

surface with a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old rubber

gasket remaining on the mounting sur-

face of the engine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a

slight resistance is felt, then tighten

additionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb

(14.7 to 20.5 Nzm)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug

with a new washer. Securely tighten

the drain plug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 Nzm)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill engine with recommended oil

and install the cap securely.

CAUTION

The dipstick must be inserted in place to pre-

vent oil spillage from the dipstick hole while

filling the engine with oil.

See “Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical

and consumer information” section for

drain and refill capacity. The drain and

refill capacity depends on the oil tem-

perature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Al-

ways use the dipstick to determine the

proper amount of oil in the engine.

CAUTION

When filling oil, do not pull out the dipstick.

10. Start the engine and check for

leakage around the drain plug and

the oil filter. Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more

than 10 minutes. Check the oil level

with the dipstick. Add engine oil if

necessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into po-

sition as the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plastic

clip out.

b. Hold the engine undercover into

position.

c. Insert the clip through the under-

cover into the hole in the frame,

then push the center of the clip in

to lock the clip in place.

d. Install the other bolts that hold the

undercover in place. Be careful not

to strip the bolts or over-tighten

them.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the

ground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter prop-

erly.

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

OProlonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

OTry to avoid direct skin contact with used

oil. If skin contact is made, wash thor-

oughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

OKeep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

When checking or replacement is re-

quired, we recommend an INFINITI dealer

for servicing.

CAUTION

OUse only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF. Do

not mix with other fluids.

OUsing automatic transmission fluid

other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF

will cause deterioration in driveability

and automatic transmission durability,

and may damage the automatic trans-

mission, which is not covered by the

INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission

fluid is also described on caution labels

located in the engine compartment.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked using

the HOT range (

: HOT MAX.,

: HOT

MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176°F

(50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range (

COLD MAX.,

: COLD MIN.) at fluid tem-

peratures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).

SDI1765A

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

ODo not overfill.

OUse Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For additional brake fluid specification in-

formation, refer to “Capacities and recom-

mended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Tech-

nical and consumer information” section.

WARNING

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contami-

nated fluid may damage the brake system.

Do not add synthetic brake fluid. The use of

improper fluids can damage the brake

system and affect the vehicle’s stopping

ability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, immediately wash the surface with

water.

BRAKE FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If

the fluid is below the MIN line

or the

brake warning light comes on, add Genu-

ine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid

or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX

line

. If fluid must be added frequently,

the system should be thoroughly checked

by an INFINITI dealer.

SDI1923

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If

the fluid level is below the MIN line

add Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty

Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to

the MAX line

If fluid is added frequently, the system

should be thoroughly checked by an

INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed container.

Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may dam-

age the clutch system.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces.

This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled,

wash the surface with water.

Add fluid when the low washer fluid

warning light comes on. Pull up the cap

and add a washer solvent to the water for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add

a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for the

mixture ratio.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze or equivalent.

SDI1906A SDI1388B

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Antifreeze is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers out of

the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant

for window washer solution. This may result

in damage to the paint.

ODo not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

OPre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concen-

trateand water.

OKeep the battery surface clean and

dry. Any corrosion should be washed

off with a solution of baking soda and

water.

OMake certain the terminal connections

are clean and securely tightened.

OIf the vehicle is not to be used for 30

days or longer, disconnect the (−)

negative battery terminal cable to pre-

vent discharging it.

Coupe

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from the

battery terminal, do not close either of front

doors. The automatic window adjusting func-

tion will not work, and the side roof panel

may be damaged.

To disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-

minal, perform the procedure in the follow-

ing order. Otherwise, the window and the

side roof panel may contact and be dam-

aged.

1. Close the windows.

BATTERY

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Open the hood.

3. Close and lock all the doors.

4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-

minal.

5. Securely close the hood.

To connect the negative (−) battery ter-

minal, perform the procedure in the follow-

ing order. Otherwise, the window and the

side roof panel may contact and be dam-

aged.

1. Unlock and open the driver side door.

Do not close the door.

2. Open the hood.

3. Connect the negative (−) battery ter-

minal. Then close the hood.

4. Fully open the driver side door window.

5. Close the driver side door and the

window.

Sedan and coupe

WARNING

ODo not expose the battery to flames or

electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas, gener-

ated by battery fluid, is explosive. Do not

allow battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After

touching a battery or battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash

your hands. If the acid contacts your

eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush

with water for at least 15 minutes and

seek medical attention.

ODo not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery which

can generate heat, reduce battery life,

and in some cases lead to an explosion.

OWhen working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

OBattery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

OKeep the battery out of the reach of chil-

dren.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the UPPER LEVEL

and LOWER LEVEL

lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only

distilled water to bring the level to the in-

dicator in each filler opening. Do not over-

fill.

1. Remove the cell plugs

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER

LEVEL

If the side of the battery is not visible,

the electrolyte level can be checked

through each filler opening as illus-

trated.

3. Tighten cell plugs

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe conditions require frequent

checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump

starting” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section. If the engine does not start by

jump starting, the battery may have to be

replaced. Contact an INFINITI dealer.

DI0137MA SDI1480

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Fan

3. Alternator

4. Crankshaft pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor

D: Tension checking points

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK

position. The engine could rotate unexpect-

edly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of

unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhe-

sion or looseness. If the belt is in poor

condition or loose, have it replaced or

adjusted by an INFINITI dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for

condition and tension in accordance

with the maintenance schedule in the

INFINITI Service and Maintenance

Guide.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged se-

curely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to remove

the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can

damage the spark plugs.

SDI1389

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see an INFINITI

dealer for servicing.

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the

platinum-tipped

spark plugs as fre-

quently as the conventional type spark

plugs since they will last much longer.

Follow the maintenance schedule in the

INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide,

but do not reuse them by cleaning or re-

gapping.

Always replace with recommended

platinum-tipped spark plugs. If maintenance is required, see an INFINITI

dealer for servicing.

The filter element should not be cleaned

and reused. Replace it according to the

maintenance intervals. See the INFINITI

Service and Maintenance Guide. When re-

placing the filter, wipe the inside of the

air cleaner housing and the cover with a

damp cloth.

WARNING

OOperating the engine with the air cleaner

removed can cause you or others to be

burned. The air cleaner not only cleans

the air, it stops the flame if the engine

backfires. If it is not there, and the en-

gine backfires, you could be burned. Do

not drive with the air cleaner removed,

and be careful when working on the en-

gine with the air cleaner removed.

ONever pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

SDI0145D

AIR CLEANER

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

OAfter wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position.

Otherwise it may be damaged when the

engine hood is opened.

OMake sure the wiper blades contact the

glass, otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

OWorn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair driver

vision.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other ma-

terial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form

when rinsing with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild de-

tergent. Then rinse the blade with clear

water. If your windshield is still not clear

after cleaning the blades and using the

wiper, replace the blades.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push and hold the release tab

then move the wiper blade down the

wiper arm to remove

3. Insert the new wiper blade to the

wiper arm until a click sounds. If necessary, clean the windshield washer

nozzle

with a needle or small pin

SDI1649

SDI1730

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

Pedal type

From the released position, depress the

parking brake pedal slowly and firmly,

and check the notches between the initial

and final position of the pedal

.Ifitis

out of the range, see an INFINITI dealer.

Range

: 2 to 3 notches under a de-

pressing force of 44 lb (196

Lever type

From the released position, pull the park-

ing brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the

number of clicks is out of the range

see an INFINITI dealer.

Range

: 6 to 7 clicks under pulling force

of 44 lb (196 N)

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the dis-

tance

between the upper surface of

the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out

of the range shown below, see an INFINITI

dealer.

Distance

: Under depressing force of

110 lb (490 N)

Automatic

Transmission model

Manual

Transmission model

3.74 in (95 mm) or more 3.54 in (90 mm) or more

SDI1391F SDI1447B DI1020MO

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-

adjusting brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every

time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See an INFINITI dealer for a brake system

check if the brake pedal height does not re-

turn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have

audible wear indicators. When a brake pad

requires replacement, it will make a high

pitched scraping or screeching sound when

the vehicle is in motion whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear in-

dicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is

normal and does not affect the function or

performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information,

see the appropriate maintenance log

shown in the INFINITI Service and Mainte-

nance Guide.

High performance sports brake pads oc-

casionally make squeaks, squeals or

other braking noises because of their very

high friction coefficient.

These occasional brake noises are

normal, but if they continue, see an

INFINITI dealer.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as fol-

lows:

1. With the engine off, press and release

the brake pedal several times. When

brake pedal movement (distance of

travel) remains the same from one

pedal application to the next, continue

on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal,

start the engine. The pedal height

should drop a little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine. Keeping the pedal de-

pressed for about 30 seconds, the

pedal height should not change.

4. Run the engine for one minute without

depressing the brake pedal, then turn

it off. Depress the brake pedal several

times. The pedal travel distance will

decrease gradually with each depres-

sion as the vacuum is released from

the booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, see

an INFINITI dealer.

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Two types of fuses are used. Type

used in the fuse boxes in the engine com-

partment. Type

is used in the passen-

ger compartment fuse box.

Type

fuses are provided as spare

fuses. They are stored in the passenger

compartment fuse box.

Type

fuses can be installed in the en-

gine compartment and passenger com-

partment fuse boxes.

If a type

fuse is used to replace a type

fuse, the type

fuse will not be level

with the fuse pocket as shown in the il-

lustration. This will not affect the perfor-

mance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is

installed in the fuse box securely.

Type

fuses cannot be installed in the

underhood fuse boxes. Only use type

fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-

perage rating than that specified on the fuse

box cover. This could damage the electrical

system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and head-

light switch are in the OFF position.

SDI1751 SDI1752 SDI1392A

FUSES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Open the engine hood and remove the

cover on the battery and the

fuse/fusible link holder.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder

cover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

The fuse puller is located in the pas-

senger compartment fuse box.

5. If the fuse is open

, replace it with a

new fuse

. Spare fuses are stored in

the passenger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the

electrical system checked and re-

paired by an INFINITI dealer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate and fuses are in good condition,

check the fusible links. If any of these

fusible links are melted, replace only with

genuine INFINITI parts.

SDI1753

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-

perage rating than that specified on the fuse

box cover. This could damage the electrical

system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are in the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Open the fuse box lid

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

4. If the fuse is open

, replace it with a

new fuse

. Spare fuses

are

stored in the fuse box.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the

electrical system checked and re-

paired by an INFINITI dealer.

SDI1962 SDI1754

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

KEYFOB (except Intelligent Key)

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool

2. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or

equivalent

Make sure that the !side faces the

bottom case.

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the keyfob button two or three

times to check its operation.

See an INFINITI dealer if you need any as-

sistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 4

above.

OBe careful not to touch the circuit board

and the battery terminal.

OAn improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

OThe keyfob is water-resistant; how-

ever, if it gets wet, immediately wipe it

completely dry.

OWhen changing batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the keyfob.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device.

SDI1731

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

INTELLIGENT KEY

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow

the battery and removed parts.

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Release the lock knob at the back of

the Intelligent Key and remove the me-

chanical key.

2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver

wrapped with a cloth into the slit

of the corner and twist it to separate

the upper part from the lower part.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

ODo not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as it could cause a

malfunction.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or

equivalent

Make sure that the !side faces the

bottom of the case. The !mark is

stamped on the bottom of the case.

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower

parts, and then push them together

until it is securely closed.

5. Push the buttons two or three times to

check its operation.

See an INFINITI dealer if you need any as-

sistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 5

above.

OBe careful not to touch the circuit board

and the battery terminal.

OAn improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

OWhen changing batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the Intelligent Key.

FCC Notice:

This equipment has been tested and found

to comply with the limits for a Class B digi-

tal device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC

Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful in-

terference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can

radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the

SDI1786 SDI1787

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

instructions, may cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio communications. However,

there is no guarantee that interference will

not occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception, which

can be determined by turning the equip-

ment off and on, the user is encouraged to

try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

OReorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna

OIncrease the separation between the

equipment and the receiver

OConnect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to which

the receiver is connected.

OConsult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Sedan

1. Front turn signal light

2. Front fog light/Park light/

Headlight (high-beam)

3. Headlight (low-beam)

4. Map light

5. Rear personal light

6. Front side marker light

7. Step light

8. Trunk light

9. High-mounted stop light

(if so equipped)

10. License plate light

11. Back-up light

12. Rear combination light

(Turn signal, Stop/Tail, Side marker)

SDI1952

LIGHTS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Coupe

1. Front turn signal light

2. Front fog light/Park light

3. Headlight (low-beam/high-beam)

4. Map light

5. Front side marker light

6. Step light

7. High-mounted stop light

(if so equipped)

8. Trunk light

9. License plate light

10. Rear combination light

(Turn signal, Stop/Tail, Back-up, Side

marker)

SDI1953

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the xenon headlight

bulb

Xenon headlight bulb:

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they produce

a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock,

never attempt to modify or disassemble. Al-

ways have your xenon headlights replaced

at an INFINITI dealer. For additional informa-

tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch”

in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

If replacement is required, see an INFINITI

dealer.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Front turn signal light* 21 T20

Front park light* 5 T10

Front side marker light 3.8 T10

Front fog light Sedan: 60/55

Coupe: 55

Sedan: H4

Coupe: H1

Rear combination light

Turn signal 21 T20

Stop/Tail* (LED) —

Side marker light* Sedan: (LED)/Coupe: 3.8 Sedan: —/Coupe: T10

Back-up light 18 T16

License plate light 5 T10

High-mounted stop light* (LED) —

Map light 8 —

Rear personal light (Sedan) 8 —

Step light 5 —

Trunk light 3.4 158

Vanity mirror light 1.32 —

*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or

D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the

lens and/or cover.

MDI0006

SDI1733

Front side marker light

SDI1570A

Sedan — Rear turn signal light

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

To replace a back-up light

1. Remove all the clips

, the handle

and inside release handle

to re-

move the trunk lid finisher.

2. Remove the connector from bulb

socket

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and remove the bulb.

SDI1510A

Sedan — Back-up light

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

SDI1734

Map light

SDI1399D

Sedan — Rear personal light

SDI1400A

Step light

SDI1258B

Trunk light

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit, one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments

and controls” section, “Tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section, and “Flat

tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec-

tion.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressure of the tires (in-

cluding the spare) often and always

prior to long distance trips. The recom-

mended tire pressure specifications are

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

label or the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label under the “COLD TIRE PRES-

SURE” heading. The Tire and Loading

Information label is affixed to the driver

side center pillar. Tire pressures should

be checked regularly because:

OMost tires naturally lose air over

time.

OTires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

The tire pressures should be check

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or

driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at mod-

erate speeds.

SDI1779A

Vanity mirror light

SDI1401B

License plate light

WHEELS AND TIRES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

Incorrect tire pressure, including under

inflation, may adversely affect tire life

and vehicle handling.

WARNING

OImproperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

OThe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. The

vehicle weight capacity is indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading In-

formation label. Do not load your

vehicle beyond this capacity.

Overloading your vehicle may re-

sult in reduced tire life, unsafe op-

erating conditions due to prema-

ture tire failure, or unfavorable

handling characteristics and could

also lead to a serious accident.

Loading beyond the specified

capacity may also result in a mal-

function of other vehicle compo-

nents.

OBefore taking a long trip, or when-

ever you heavily load your vehicle,

use a tire pressure gauge to en-

sure that the tire pressures are at

the specified level.

ODo not drive your vehicle over 85

MPH (137 km/h) unless it is

equipped with high speed rated

tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH

(137 km/h) may result in tire mal-

function, loss of control and pos-

sible injury.

OFor additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada)

in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

Tire and loading information label

1Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can be

seated in the vehicle.

2Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-

mation in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section.

3Original size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires

to this pressure when the tires are

cold. Tires are considered COLD

after the vehicle has been parked for

3 or more hours, or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The recommended cold tire inflation

is set by the manufacturer to pro-

vide the best balance of tire wear,

vehicle handling, driveability, tire

noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s

GVWR.

5Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”

later in this section.

6Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped)

SDI1948

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press

too hard or force the valve stem

sideways, or air will escape. If the

hissing sound of air escaping from

the tire is heard while checking the

pressure, reposition the gauge to

eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare it to the specifi-

cation shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or re-

lease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare. (Refer to the

“Wheels and tires” section)

Sedan

model Size Cold Tire

Inflation

Pressure

Front

Original

Tire

P215/55R17 93V

235/45R18 94W

210 kPa

(30 psi)

230 kPa

(33 psi)

Rear

Original

Tire

P215/55R17 93V

235/45R18 94W

210 kPa

(30 psi)

230 kPa

(33 psi)

Spare

Tire

T145/80D17

P215/55R17 93V*1

420 kPa

(60 psi)

210 kPa

(30 psi)

*1 Option for USA, conventional for

Canada (for models with tire size

P215/55R17 93V)

SDI1949

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Coupe

model Size Cold Tire

Inflation

Pressure

Front

Original

Tire

P225/50R17 93V

225/45R18 91W

225/40R19 89Y

210 kPa

(30 psi)

240 kPa

(35 psi)

240 kPa

(35 psi)

Rear

Original

Tire

P235/50R17 95V

245/45R18 96W

245/40R19 94Y

210 kPa

(30 psi)

240 kPa

(35 psi)

240 kPa

(35 psi)

Spare

Tire T145/80D17 420 kPa

(60 psi)

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers

to place standardized information on

the sidewall of all tires. This informa-

tion identifies and describes the funda-

mental characteristics of the tire and

also provides the tire identification

number (TIN) for safety standard certifi-

cation. The TIN can be used to identify

the tire in case of a recall.

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles. (Not

all tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in millime-

ters of the tire from sidewall edge to

sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

SDI1575

Example

SDI1951

Example

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in

inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is

a measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating. q

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment of Transportation”. The

symbol can be placed above,

below or to the left or right of

the Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s iden-

tification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-

tional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-

ture

6. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For ex-

ample, the numbers 3103 mean the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers

are missing, then look on the other

sidewall of the tire.

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which in-

clude steel, nylon, polyester, and

others.

4Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the

maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure.

SDI1607

Example

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When re-

placing the tires on the vehicle, al-

ways use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the

tire has radial structure.

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, In-

tended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the

sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears manufac-

turer, brand and/or model name

molding that is higher or deeper than

the same molding on the other sidewall

of the tire, or (2) the outward facing

sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that

has a particular side that must always

face outward when mounted on a ve-

hicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

OWhen changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. An INFINITI dealer may be

able to help you with information about

tire type, size, speed rating and avail-

ability.

OReplacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

OReplacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS).

OFor additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

All season tires

INFINITI specifies All Season tires on some

models to provide good performance for

use all year, including snowy and icy road

conditions. All Season tires are identified

by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire

sidewall. Snow tires have better snow trac-

tion than All Season tires and may be

more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

INFINITI specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire traction

rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in

snowy or icy conditions, INFINITI recom-

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

mends the use of SNOW or ALL SEASON

tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary

to select tires equivalent in size and load

rating to the original equipment tires. If

you do not, it can adversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower

speed ratings than factory equipped tires

and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, INFINITI recommends the use

of snow or all season tires on all four

wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some

provinces and states prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws be-

fore installing studded tires. Skid and

traction capabilities of studded snow

tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

All-wheel drive (AWD) models

CAUTION

OAlways use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires

on the front and rear axles which will

cause excessive tire wear and may

damage the transmission, transfer case

and differential gears.

OONLY use spare tires specified for the

AWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced

with tires of the same size, brand, con-

struction and tread pattern. The tire pres-

sure and wheel alignment should also be

checked and corrected as necessary. Con-

tact an INFINITI dealer.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on paved

roads which are clear of snow. Driving

with chains in such conditions can cause

damage to the various mechanisms of the

vehicle due to some overstress.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-

cording to location. Check the local laws

before installing tire chains. When install-

ing tire chains, make sure they are the

proper size for the tires on your vehicle

and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are

used on vehicles with restricted tire to ve-

hicle clearance. Vehicles that can use

Class “S” chains are designed to meet

the minimum clearances between the tire

and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommo-

date the use of a winter traction device

(tire chains or cables). The minimum

clearances are determined using the fac-

tory equipped tires. Other types may

damage your vehicle. Use chain ten-

sioners when recommended by the tire

chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.

Loose end links of the tire chain must be

secured or removed to prevent the possi-

bility of whipping action damage to the

fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid

fully loading your vehicle when using tire

chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

damaged and/or vehicle handling and

performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire.

Do not use the chains on dry roads. Driv-

ing with chains in such conditions can

cause damage to the various mechanisms

of the vehicle due to some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation (Sedan)

INFINITI recommends rotating the tires

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section for tire replacing

procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a

torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened

to specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specification at each tire rotation in-

terval.

WARNING

OAfter rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.

ORetighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600

miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a

flat tire, etc.).

ODo not include the T-type spare

tire or any other small size spare

tire in the tire rotation.

OFor additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada)

in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

Tire rotation (Coupe)

Tires cannot be rotated on this vehicle,

as front tires are a different size from

DI0048-D

Sedan

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

rear tires and the direction of the wheel

rotation is fixed for each tire.

A pin is on the front brake rotor to pre-

vent the rear wheels from being in-

stalled in place of the front wheels. The

spare tire can be installed in place of

the front and rear wheels. When install-

ing the spare tire in the front wheel, the

hole in the spare tire wheel must be

aligned with the pin on the brake rotor.

WARNING

ORetighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600

miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a

flat tire, etc.).

OFor additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada)

in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

OTires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

OThe original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

OTires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because some

tire damage may not be obvious.

Replace the tires as necessary to

prevent tire failure and possible

personal injury.

OImproper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal in-

jury. If it is necessary to repair the

spare tire, contact an INFINITI

dealer.

OFor additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada)

in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. See “Specifica-

MDI0004C

8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

tions” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section for recommended

types and sizes of tires and wheels.

WARNING

The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of dif-

ferent brands, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), or tread patterns can ad-

versely affect the ride, braking, handling,

ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance,

tire chain clearance, speedometer calibra-

tion, headlight aim and bumper height.

Some of these effects may lead to accidents

and could result in serious personal injury.

OIf the wheels are changed for any reason,

always replace with wheels which have

the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a

different off-set could cause premature

tire wear, degrade vehicle handling char-

acteristics and/or interference with the

brake discs. Such interference can lead

to decreased braking efficiency and/or

early brake pad wear.

OWhen a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-

cated, the TPMS will not function and the

low tire pressure warning light will flash.

Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or sys-

tem resetting.

OReplacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

ODo not install a deformed wheel or tire

even if it has been repaired. Such wheels

or tires could have structural damage

and could malfunction without warning.

OThe use of retread tires is not recom-

mended.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada)

in the Warranty Information Booklet.

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or ra-

dial), and tread pattern on all four wheels.

Failure to do so may result in a circumference

difference between tires on the front and

rear axles which will cause excessive tire

wear and may damage the transmission,

transfer case and differential gears (AWD

models).

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han-

dling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to transmission damage.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

Care of wheels

OWash the wheels when washing the

vehicle to maintain their appearance.

OClean the inner side of the wheels

when the wheel is changed or the un-

derside of the vehicle is washed.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-47

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

ODo not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss

of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

OINFINITI recommends that the road

wheels be waxed to protect against

road salt in areas where it is used

during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire (T-type))

Observe the following precautions if the

T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise

your vehicle could be damaged or in-

volved in an accident.

CAUTION

The T-type spare tire should be used only

for an emergency. It should be replaced by

a standard tire at the first opportunity.

ODrive carefully while the T-type spare tire

is installed.

Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking

while driving.

OPeriodically check the T-type spare tire

inflation pressure, and always keep it at

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

OWith the T-type spare tire installed, do

not drive your vehicle at speeds faster

than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

OWhen driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the T-type spare tire should

be used on the front wheel and the origi-

nal tire used on the rear wheels (drive

wheels). Use tire chains only on the rear

two original tires (Sedan).

Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear

at a faster rate than the original tire. Re-

place the T-type spare tire as soon as the

tread wear indicators appear.

ODo not use the T-type spare tire on other

vehicles.

ODo not use more than one T-type spare

tire at the same time.

ODo not tow a trailer while the T-type

spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

ODo not use tire chains on a T-type spare

tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on

the T-type spare tire and may cause

damage to the vehicle.

OBecause the T-type spare tire is smaller

than the original tire, ground clearance

is reduced. To avoid damage to the ve-

hicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do

not drive the vehicle through an auto-

matic car wash since it may get caught.

8-48 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ... 9-2

Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-5

Recommended SAE viscosity number .......... 9-6

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations ......................... 9-7

Specifications................................................... 9-8

Engine......................................................... 9-8

Wheels and tires......................................... 9-9

Dimensions and weights ............................. 9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country .............................................. 9-10

Vehicle identification ...................................... 9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate... 9-10

Vehicle identification number (Chassis

number)..................................................... 9-10

Engine serial number ................................. 9-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..... 9-11

Emission control information label............. 9-12

Tire and loading information label ............. 9-12

Air conditioner specification label.............. 9-13

Installing front license plate............................ 9-13

Vehicle loading information ............................ 9-14

Terms ........................................................ 9-14

Vehicle load capacity ................................. 9-15

Loading tips............................................... 9-17

Measurements of weights.......................... 9-17

Towing a trailer............................................... 9-18

Maximum load limits ................................. 9-18

Towing load/specification chart ................. 9-19

Towing safety ............................................ 9-19

Flat towing ................................................ 9-22

Uniform tire quality grading............................ 9-23

Emission control system warranty .................. 9-24

Reporting safety defects (US only).................. 9-24

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)

test (US only).................................................. 9-25

Event data recorders ...................................... 9-26

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ................................................... 9-26

In the event of a collision.......................... 9-27

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure in-

structed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended

specifications

measure Imp

measure Liter

Fuel*1 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 76

Engine oil (Drain and refill)*8

With oil filter change 5 qt 4-1/8 qt 4.7 OAPI Certification Mark*2, *3

OAPI grade SG/SH, Energy ConservingI&IIorAPIgrade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3

OILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III*2, *3

Without oil filter change 4-5/8 qt 3-7/8 qt 4.4

Cooling system

With reservoir 9-1/4 qt 7-5/8 qt 8.7 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/5 qt 0.8

Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*4

Manual transmission gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)

HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90

Differential gear oil — — — API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90*5

Transfer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or CANADA NISSAN Automatic Trans-

mission Fluid*6

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper fluid level according to the in-

structions in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*10

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*9

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent

Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.

*2: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section.

*3: For additional information, see “Recommended SAE viscosity number” later in this section.

*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not

covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

*5: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures always above 32°F (0°C).

*6: DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an INFINITI dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended

brand(s) of DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM automatic transmission fluid.

*7: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI dealer.

*8: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.

*9: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.

*10: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Sedan — Automatic transmission

models

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In-

dex) number (Research octane number 91).

For improved vehicle performance,

INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with an octane rating of

at least 91 AKI number (Research octane

number 96).

Sedan — Manual transmission

and Coupe models

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-

Knock Index) number (Research octane

number 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, un-

leaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane

number 91) may be temporarily used, but

only under the following precautions:

OHave the fuel tank filled only partially

with unleaded regular gasoline, and

fill up with unleaded premium gaso-

line as soon as possible.

OAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt

acceleration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-

line is recommended.

CAUTION

OUsing a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission con-

trol system, and may also affect the war-

ranty coverage.

OUnder no circumstances should a leaded

gasoline be used, because this will dam-

age the three-way catalyst.

ODo not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on E-85

fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel

system components and is not covered

by the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter

(WWFC) specifications where it is avail-

able. Many of the automobile manufactur-

ers developed this specification to im-

prove emission control system and ve-

hicle performance. Ask your service

station manager if the gasoline meets the

WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing

reformulated gasolines. These gasolines

are specially designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. INFINITI supports efforts to-

wards cleaner air and suggests that you

use reformulated gasoline when avail-

able.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE

and methanol with or without advertising

their presence. INFINITI does not recom-

mend the use of fuels of which the oxy-

genate content and the fuel compatibility

for your INFINITI cannot be readily deter-

mined. If in doubt, ask your service sta-

tion manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as

the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle

Technical and consumer information 9-3

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

performance problems and/or fuel system

damage.

OThe fuel must be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that recom-

mended for unleaded gasoline.

OIf an oxygenate-blend, excepting a

methanol blend, is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

OIf a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in INFINITI vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as en-

gine stalling and hard hot starting are ex-

perienced after using oxygenate-blend fu-

els, immediately change to a non-

oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend

of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately

85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gaso-

line. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible

Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in

your vehicle. U.S. government regulations

require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to

be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (i.e. fuel in-

jector cleaner, octane booster, intake

valve deposit removers, etc.) which are

sold commercially. Many of these addi-

tives intended for gum, varnish or deposit

removal may contain active solvent or

similar ingredients that can be harmful to

the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark

knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If

you detect a persistent heavy spark knock

even when using gasoline of the stated oc-

tane rating, or if you hear steady spark

knock while holding a steady speed on

level roads, have your dealer correct the

condition. Failure to correct the condition

is misuse of the vehicle, for which INFINITI

is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in

knocking, after-run or overheating. This in

turn may cause excessive fuel consump-

tion or damage to the engine. If any of the

above symptoms are encountered, have

your vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer

or other competent service facility.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while ac-

celerating or driving up hills. This is no

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance.

See “Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants” earlier in this section.

INFINITI recommends the use of an energy

conserving oil in order to improve fuel

economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Stan-

dardization and Approval Committee

(ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity

standard. These oils have the API certifi-

cation mark on the front of the container.

Oils which do not have the specified

quality label should not be used as they

could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of

oil additives. The use of an oil additive is

not necessary when the proper oil type is

used and maintenance intervals are fol-

lowed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or

has been previously used should not be

used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness

changes with temperature. Because of

this, it is important that the engine oil vis-

cosity be selected based on the tempera-

tures at which the vehicle will be oper-

ated before the next oil change. The rec-

ommended SAE viscosity number chart

shows the recommended oil viscosities

for the expected ambient temperatures.

Choosing an oil viscosity other than that

recommended could cause serious engine

damage.

STI0367

Technical and consumer information 9-5

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-

quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-

placing, use the genuine oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in

change intervals.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for

your engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Oil and

filter other than the specified quality, or

oil and filter change intervals longer than

recommended could reduce engine life.

Damage to engines caused by improper

maintenance or use of incorrect oil and

filter quality and/or viscosity is not cov-

ered by the new INFINITI vehicle limited

warranties.

Your engine was filled with a high quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not

have to change the oil before the first rec-

ommended change interval. Oil and filter

change intervals depend upon how you

use your vehicle. Operation under the fol-

lowing conditions may require more fre-

quent oil and filter changes.

Orepeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures

Odriving in dusty conditions

Oextensive idling

Otowing a trailer

Ostop and go commuting

Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Mainte-

nance Guide” for the maintenance sched-

ule.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY

NUMBER

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all

ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30,

10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the am-

bient temperature is above 0°F (−18°C).

TI1028-C

9-6 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in this INFINITI

vehicle must be charged with the refrig-

erant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,

Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact

equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant

will cause severe damage to the air condi-

tioning system and will require the replace-

ment of all air conditioner system compo-

nents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant

does not affect the earth’s atmosphere,

certain governmental regulations require

the recovery and recycling of any refriger-

ant during automotive air conditioning

system service. An INFINITI dealer has the

trained technicians and equipment

needed to recover and recycle your air

conditioning system refrigerant.

Contact an INFINITI dealer when servicing

your air conditioning system.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6*

Idle speed rpm See the emission control label on

the underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

CO percentage at idle speed [No air] %

Spark plug Standard PLFR5A-11

Service option PLFR4A-11, PLFR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle

meets all requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regula-

tions.

TI0001-A

SPECIFICATIONS

9-8 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Position Size Offset in (mm)

Sedan Aluminum — 17 x 7JJ 1.77 (45)

— 18 x 7-1/2JJ 1.77 (45)

Coupe Aluminum

Front 17 x 7-1/2JJ 1.18 (30)

Rear 17 x 8JJ 1.30 (33)

Front 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)

Rear 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)

Front 19 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)

Rear 19 x 8-1/2JJ 1.30 (33)

Tire

Type Position Size Pressure (Cold)

Sedan

Conventional — P215/55R17 93V 210 kPa (30 psi)

— 235/45R18 94W 230 kPa (33 psi)

Spare — T145/80D17 420 kPa (60 psi)

P215/55R17 93V*1 210 kPa (30 psi)

Coupe Conventional

Front P225/50R17 93V 210 kPa (30 psi)

Rear P235/50R17 95V 210 kPa (30 psi)

Front 225/45R18 91W 240 kPa (35 psi)

Rear 245/45R18 96W 240 kPa (35 psi)

Front 225/40R19 89Y 240 kPa (35 psi)

Rear 245/40R19 94Y 240 kPa (35 psi)

Spare — T145/80D17 420 kPa (60 psi)

*1: Option for USA, conventional for Canada (for models with tire size P215/55R17

93V)

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Coupe

Overall length in (mm) 186.9 (4,747) 182.2 (4,628)

Overall width in (mm) 69.0 (1,753) 71.5 (1,815)

Overall height in (mm) 57.7 (1,467)*1

58.4 (1,484)*2

54.8 (1,393)

55.1 (1,399)*3

Front tread in (mm) 59.1 (1,500)*1

59.3 (1,505)*2 60.4 (1,535)

Rear tread in (mm) 59.3 (1,505) 60.6 (1,540)*4

60.8 (1,545)*5

Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2,850) 112.2 (2,850)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label on the driver’s

side lock pillar.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

*1: For 2WD models

*2: For AWD models

*3: For 18 in and 19 in road wheel models

*4: For models with road wheel size — 17 x 8JJ and 19 x 8-1/2JJ [offset 1.30 in (33

mm)]

*5: For models with road wheel size — 18 x 8JJ [offset 1.18 in (30 mm)]

Technical and consumer information 9-9

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

When planning to travel in another

country, you should first find out if the

fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s

engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating

may cause engine damage. All gasoline

vehicles must be operated with unleaded

engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking

your vehicle to areas where appropriate

fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify

the vehicle to meet local laws and regula-

tions.

The laws and regulations for motor ve-

hicle emission control and safety stan-

dards vary according to the country,

state, province or district; therefore, ve-

hicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, trans-

portation, and registration are the respon-

sibility of the user. INFINITI is not respon-

sible for any inconvenience that may re-

sult.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is

attached as shown. This number is the

identification for your vehicle and is used

in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

STI0038 STI0302

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR

VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

9-10 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards (F.M.V.S.S.) or Canadian Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards (C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-

cation label is affixed as shown. This

label contains valuable vehicle informa-

tion, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc.

Review it carefully.

STI0303C STI0186B

Sedan

STI0330A

Coupe

Technical and consumer information 9-11

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressures are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label affixed

to the driver side center pillar.

STI0317 STI0368A

Sedan

STI0331A

Coupe

9-12 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is

affixed inside of the hood as shown.

STI0306

STI0332

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Technical and consumer information 9-13

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Use the following steps to mount the li-

cense plate:

Before mounting the license plate, con-

firm that the following parts are enclosed

in the vinyl bag.

OLicense plate bracket

OJ-nut x 2

OScrew x 2

OScrew grommet x 2

1. Temporarily place the license plate

bracket and mark the pilot hole points

using holes

while aligning the

towing hook hole of the front bumper

fascia.

2. Remove the license plate bracket.

3. Carefully drill two pilot holes

using

a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the

marked locations. (Be sure that the

drill only goes through the fascia, or

damage to the nut may occur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on the

fascia.

5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the

grommet hole to turn part

90 de-

grees.

6. Insert a J-nut into the license plate

bracket before placing the license

plate bracket on the fascia.

7. Install the license plate bracket with

screws.

8. Install the license plate with bolts that

are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING

OIt is extremely dangerous to ride in

a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In

a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

ODo not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

OBe sure everyone in your vehicle is

in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before loading

your vehicle:

OCurb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment,

fluids, emergency tools, and spare

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

9-14 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

tire assembly. This weight does not

include passengers and cargo.

OGVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

OGVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

- maximum total combined weight of

the unloaded vehicle, passengers,

luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load

and any other optional equipment.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

OGAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit speci-

fied for the front or rear axle. This

information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

OGCWR (Gross Combined Weight

Rating) - maximum total weight

rating of the vehicle, passengers,

cargo and trailer.

OVehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo that can be loaded into the ve-

hicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a

trailer, the trailer tongue weight

must be included as part of the

cargo load. This information is lo-

cated on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

OCargo capacity - permissible weight

of cargo, the subtracted weight of

occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-

hicle shown as “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not ex-

ceed the number of occupants shown

as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight to the value. Examples are

shown in the following illustration.

Technical and consumer information 9-15

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or XXX

lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg

or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x

150) = 650 lbs.) or (640 − 340 (5 x

70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

STI0445

9-16 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for

your vehicle. See ‘‘Measurement of

Weights’’ later in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. See the Tire and Loading In-

formation label.

LOADING TIPS

OThe GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

ODo not load the front and rear axle

to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed

the GVWR.

WARNING

OProperly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

ODo not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs. If

you do, parts of your vehicle can

break, tire damage could occur, or

it can change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury.

OOverloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the tire,

but can also cause unsafe vehicle

handling and longer braking dis-

tances. This may cause a prema-

ture tire failure which could result

in a serious accident and personal

injury. Failures caused by over-

loading are not covered by the ve-

hicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of

your vehicle. When the vehicle is

loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the

front and the rear wheels separately to

determine axle loads. Individual axle

loads should not exceed either of the

gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The

total of the axle loads should not ex-

ceed the gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR). These ratings are given on the

vehicle certification label. If weight rat-

ings are exceeded, move or remove

items to bring all weights below the rat-

ings.

Technical and consumer information 9-17

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a trailer

and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle

handling, braking and performance and may

lead to accidents.

CAUTION

ODo not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load

for the first 500 miles (800 km).

Your engine, axle or other parts could be

damaged.

OFor the first 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full

throttle. This helps the engine and other

parts of your vehicle wear in at the

heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be

used primarily to carry passengers and

cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will

place additional loads on a vehicle’s en-

gine, drive train, steering, braking and

other systems.

An INFINITI Towing Guide (U.S. only) is

available on the website at

www. infiniti.com. This guide includes in-

formation on trailer towing capability and

the special equipment required for proper

towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to ex-

ceed the value specified in the Towing

Load/Specification Chart found later in

this section. The total trailer load equals

trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

Towing loads greater than specified or us-

ing improper towing equipment could ad-

versely affect vehicle handling, braking

and performance. The ability of a vehicle

to tow a trailer is not only related to the

maximum trailer loads, but also the

places you plan to tow. Tow weights ap-

propriate for level highway driving may

have to be reduced on very steep grades

or in low traction situations (for example,

on slippery boat ramps).

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper

towing procedures are not covered by

INFINITI warranties.

Tongue load

Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11%

of the total trailer load within the

maximum tongue load limits shown in the

following Towing Load/Specification

Chart. If the tongue load becomes exces-

sive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper

tongue load.

TI1011M

TOWING A TRAILER

9-18 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

Maximum gross vehicle weight/

maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing ve-

hicle must not exceed the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR) shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The gross vehicle weight equals the com-

bined weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue

load and any other optional equipment. In

addition, front or rear gross axle weight

must not exceed GAWR shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

CHART

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

Unit: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM

TOWING LOAD 1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM

TONGUE LOAD 100 (45.4)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for a vehicle and

trailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is se-

curely attached to the vehicle, to help

avoid personal injury or property damage

due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough

road surfaces or passing trucks.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and

weight rating for a trailer:

OThe required hitch ball size is stamped

on most trailer couplers. Most hitch

balls also have the size printed on top

of the ball.

OChoose the proper class hitch ball

based on the trailer weight.

OThe diameter of the threaded shank of

the hitch ball must be matched to the

ball mount hole diameter. The hitch

ball shank should be no more than

1/160smaller than the hole in the ball

mount.

OThe threaded shank of the hitch ball

must be long enough to be properly

secured to the ball mount. There

should be at least 2 threads showing

beyond the lock washer and nut.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equip-

ment to the vehicle that has a 2,000 lb

(909 kg) maximum weight rating, but your

vehicle is only capable of towing the

maximum trailer weights shown in the

Towing Load/Specification Chart earlier in

this section.

TI1012M

Technical and consumer information 9-19

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

ODo not use axle-mounted hitches.

OThe hitch should not be attached to or af-

fect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

ODo not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

OTo reduce the possibility of additional

damage if your vehicle is struck from the

rear, where practical, remove the hitch

and/or receiver when not in use.

OAfter the hitch is removed, seal the bolt

holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or

dust from entering the passenger com-

partment.

ORegularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

OWhen towing a trailer, inflate the ve-

hicle tires to the recommended cold

tire pressure indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

OTrailer tire condition, size, load

rating and proper inflation pressure

should be in accordance with the

trailer and tire manufacturers’ speci-

fications.

Safety chains

Always use a suitable chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. The safety

chains should be crossed and should be

attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle

bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough

slack in the chains to permit turning cor-

ners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical sys-

tem, a commercially available power-type

module/converter must be used to provide

power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses

the vehicle battery as a direct power source

for all trailer lights while using the vehicle

tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits

as a signal source. The module/converter

must draw no more than 15 milliamps from

the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a

module/converter that exceeds these power

requirements may damage the vehicle’s

electrical system. See a reputable trailer

dealer to obtain the proper equipment and to

have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal

and/or local regulations. For assistance in

hooking up trailer lights, contact an

INFINITI dealer or reputable trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking

system, make sure it conforms to federal

and/or local regulations and that it is

properly installed.

9-20 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system directly

to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

OBe certain your vehicle maintains a

level position when a loaded and/or

unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not

drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal

nose-up or nose-down condition;

check for improper tongue load, over-

load, worn suspension or other pos-

sible causes of either condition.

OAlways secure items in the trailer to

prevent load shifts while driving.

OLoad the trailer so approximately 60%

of the trailer load is in the front half

and 40% is in the back half.

OCheck your hitch, trailer tire pressure,

vehicle tire pressure, trailer light op-

eration, and trailer wheel lug nuts

every time you attach a trailer to the

vehicle.

Be certain your rear view mirrors con-

form to all federal, state or local regula-

tions. If not, install any mirrors required

for towing before driving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an under-

standing of the vehicle’s behavior, you

should practice turning, stopping and

backing up in an area which is free from

traffic. Steering stability, and braking per-

formance will be somewhat different than

under normal driving conditions.

OAlways secure items in the trailer to

prevent load shift while driving.

OAvoid abrupt starts, acceleration or

stops.

OAvoid sharp turns or lane changes.

OAlways drive your vehicle at a mod-

erate speed. Some states or provinces

have specific speed limits for vehicles

that are towing trailers. Obey the local

speed limits.

OWhen backing up, hold the bottom of

the steering wheel with one hand.

Move your hand in the direction in

which you want the trailer to go. Make

small corrections and back up slowly.

If possible, have someone guide you

when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle

and trailer when parking. Parking on a

slope is not recommended; however, if

you must do so, and if your vehicle is

equipped with automatic transmission,

first apply the parking brake and block

the wheels, and then move the transmis-

sion selector lever into the P (Park) posi-

tion. If you move the selector lever to

the P (Park) position before applying the

parking brake and blocking the wheels,

transmission damage could occur.

OWhen going down a hill, shift into a

lower gear and use the engine braking

effect. When going up a long grade,

downshift the transmission to a lower

gear and reduce speed to reduce

chances of engine overloading and/or

overheating.

However, for long steep grades, do

not stay in 1st or 2nd gear when

driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h).

OIf the engine coolant rises to an ex-

tremely high temperature when the air

conditioning system is on, turn off the

air conditioner. Coolant heat can be

additionally vented by opening the

windows, switching the fan control to

high and setting the temperature con-

trol to the HOT position.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OTrailer towing requires more fuel than

normal circumstances.

OAvoid towing a trailer for the first 500

miles (800 km).

OHave your vehicle serviced more often

than at intervals specified in the rec-

ommended maintenance schedule in

the INFINITI Service and Maintenance

Guide.

OWhen making a turn, your trailer

wheels will be closer to the inside of

the turn than your vehicle wheels. To

compensate for this, make a larger

than normal turning radius during the

turn.

OCrosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,

possibly causing vehicle sway. When

being passed by larger vehicles, be

prepared for possible changes in

crosswinds that could affect vehicle

handling. If swaying does occur, firmly

grip the steering wheel, steer straight

ahead, and immediately (but gradu-

ally) reduce vehicle speed. This combi-

nation will help stabilize the vehicle.

Never increase speed.

Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires

considerably more distance than normal

passing. Remember the length of the

trailer must also pass the other vehicle

before you can safely change lanes.

OTo maintain engine braking efficiency

and electrical charging performance,

do not use sixth gear (manual trans-

mission) or fifth position (automatic

transmission).

OAvoid holding the brake pedal down

too long or too frequently. This could

cause the brakes to overheat, re-

sulting in reduced braking efficiency.

OIncrease your following distance to al-

low for greater stopping distances

while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops

and brake gradually.

ODo not use cruise control while towing

a trailer.

OCheck your hitch, trailer wiring har-

ness connections, and trailer wheel

lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of

travel and at every break.

OWhen stopped in traffic for long pe-

riods of time in hot weather, put the

vehicle in the P (Park) position.

When towing a trailer, transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently.

For additional information, see the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

earlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels

on the ground is sometimes called flat

towing. This method is sometimes used

when towing a vehicle behind a recre-

ational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

OFailure to follow these guidelines can re-

sult in severe transmission damage.

OWhenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

ODO NOT tow any automatic transmission

vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL

DAMAGE internal transmission parts due

to lack of transmission lubrication.

9-22 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

OFor emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by INFINITI” in

the “6. In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Automatic transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-

matic transmission, an appropriate ve-

hicle dolly MUST be placed under the

towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always

follow the dolly manufacturer’s recom-

mendations when using their product.

Manual transmission

OAlways tow with the manual transmis-

sion in Neutral.

OAfter towing 500 miles, start and idle

the engine with the transmission in

Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle

the engine after every 500 miles of

towing may cause damage to the

transmission’s internal parts.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-

ing based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear

one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on

the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires de-

pends upon the actual conditions of their

use, however, and may depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variations in

driving habits, service practices and dif-

ferences in road characteristics and cli-

mate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades

represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet

pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-

nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-

acteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades A (the highest),

B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire

life, and excessive temperature can lead

to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-

sponds to a level of performance which

all passenger car tires must meet under

the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 9-23

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

109. Grades B and A represent higher lev-

els of performance on the laboratory test

wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-

inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can cause heat

build-up and possible tire failure.

Your INFINITI is covered by the following

emission warranties.

For US:

OEmission Defects Warranty

OEmissions Performance Warranty

(See Warranty Information Booklet for

details.)

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found

with other vehicle warranties in your War-

ranty Information Booklet (Warranty and

Roadside Assistance Information (Canada

only)) that comes with your INFINITI. If you

did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assis-

tance Information (Canada only)), or it has

become lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

OINFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 47038, Gardena, CA 90247-

6838

ONissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying

INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-

vidual problems between you, your

dealer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-

hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153): go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify INFINITI by contacting

our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-

free, at 1-800-662-6200.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)

9-24 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) should never be tested using a two

wheel dynamometer (such as the dyna-

mometers used by some states for emis-

sions testing), or similar equipment. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with AWD

before it is placed on a dynamometer. Us-

ing the wrong test equipment may result

in transmission damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal in-

jury.

Due to legal requirements in some states/

areas, your vehicle may be required to be

in what is called the “ready condition” for

an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of

the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the “ready condition”

can be obtained by ordinary usage of the

vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-

paired or the battery is disconnected, the

vehicle may be reset to a not “ready con-

dition”. Before taking the I/M test, check

the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test

readiness condition. Turn the ignition

switch ON without starting the engine. If

the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

comes on steady for 20 seconds and then

blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condi-

tion is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-

tion is “ready”. If the MIL indicates the

vehicle is in a “not ready” condition, drive

the vehicle through the following pattern

to set the vehicle to the ready condition.

If you cannot or do not want to perform

the driving pattern, an INFINITI dealer can

conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and pru-

dent manner according to traffic conditions

and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to

idle until the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge needle points between the

C and H (normal operating tempera-

ture).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88

km/h), then quickly release the accel-

erator pedal completely and keep it re-

leased for at least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal

for a moment, then drive the vehicle at

a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96

km/h) for at least 9 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine

running.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55

km/h) and maintain the speed for 20

seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88

km/h) and maintain the speed for at

least 3 minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatic

transmission selector lever in the “P”

or “N” position or the manual trans-

mission shift lever in the “N” position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one

more time.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat

the preceding step. Any safe driving mode

is acceptable between steps. Do not stop

the engine until step 7 is completed.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

Technical and consumer information 9-25

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of

computers that monitor and control a

number of systems to optimize perfor-

mance and help service technicians with

diagnosis and repair. Some of the com-

puters monitor emission control systems,

braking systems, engine systems, trans-

mission systems, tire pressure systems,

and air bag systems. Some data about ve-

hicle operation may be stored in the com-

puters for use during servicing. Other

data may be stored if a crash event oc-

curs. For example, vehicle speed, brake

application, steering angle, air bag readi-

ness, air bag performance, and seat belt

use by the driver or passenger may be re-

corded. These types of systems are some-

times called Event Data Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to access

the electronic data that may be stored in

the vehicle’s computers (sounds are not

recorded). INFINITI and INFINITI dealers

have equipment to access some of this

data; others may also have this equip-

ment. The data may be retrieved during

routine vehicle servicing or for special re-

search. It might also be accessed with the

consent of the vehicle owner or lessee, in

response to a request by law enforce-

ment, or as otherwise required or permit-

ted by law.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the

best source of service and repair informa-

tion for your vehicle. Filled with wiring

diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step

diagnostic and adjustment procedures,

this manual is the same one used by the

factory trained technicians working at an

INFINITI dealer. Also available are genuine

INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, and genuine

INFINITI Service and Owner’s Manuals for

older INFINITI models.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of

genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the

2000 model year and later, contact:

Tweddle Litho Company

1-800-450-9491

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of

genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the

1999 model year and prior, see an INFINITI

dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Road

Strongsville, OH 44136

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of

genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for this

EVENT DATA RECORDERS OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL

ORDER INFORMATION

9-26 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

model year and prior, see an INFINITI

dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Road

Strongsville, OH 44136

1-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please

contact an INFINITI dealer. For the phone

number and location of an INFINITI dealer

in your area call the INFINITI Satisfaction

Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingual

INFINITI representative will assist you.

Also available are genuine INFINITI Ser-

vice and Owner’s Manuals for older

INFINITI models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this

unlikely event, there is some important

information you should know. Many insur-

ance companies routinely authorize the

use of non-genuine collision parts in

order to cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of Genuine

INFINITI Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored

using parts made to INFINITI’s original ex-

acting specifications — if you want to

help it to last and hold its resale value,

the solution is simple. Tell your insurance

agent and your repair shop to only use

Genuine INFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITI

does not warrant non-INFINITI parts, nor

does INFINITI’s warranty apply to damage

caused by a non-genuine parts.

Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help pro-

tect your personal safety, preserve your

warranty protection and maintain the re-

sale value of your vehicle. And if your ve-

hicle was leased, using Genuine INFINITI

Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary

excess wear and tear expenses at the end

of your lease.

INFINITI designs its hoods with crumple

zones to minimize the risk that the hood

will penetrate the windshield of your ve-

hicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imita-

tion) parts may not provide such built-in

safety features. Also, non-genuine parts

often show premature wear, rust and cor-

rosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must

be advised if non-genuine parts are used

to repair your vehicle. And some

states/provinces have enacted laws that

restrict insurance companies from autho-

rizing the use of non-genuine collision

parts during the new vehicle warranty.

These laws help protect you, so you can

take action to protect yourself.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information

visit us at:

www.infiniti.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)

Technical and consumer information 9-27

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

9-28 Technical and consumer information

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

10 Index

ABS (Anti-lock brake system)........................... 5-26

Advanced air bag system ................................. 1-42

Air bag system

Front (See INFINITI advanced air bag

system) ..................................................... 1-42

Side and curtain (See supplemental side

air bag and curtain side-impact air bag

systems) ................................................... 1-48

Front passenger air bag and status light... 1-44

Air bag warning labels...................................... 1-51

Air bag warning light................................ 1-51, 2-14

Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-20

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation........................... 4-10

Air conditioner service ...................... 4-10, 4-14

Air conditioner specification label ............. 9-13

Air conditioning system refrigerant

and lubricant recommendations ......... 4-14, 9-7

Ambient temperature................................. 4-13

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ...... 4-10

In-cabin microfilter .................................... 4-13

Alcohol, drugs and driving................................. 5-5

All-wheel drive (AWD)....................................... 5-23

All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light................... 2-9

Anchor point locations

Top tether strap......................................... 1-27

Antenna........................................................... 4-29

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .......................... 5-26

Anti-lock brake warning light ........................... 2-10

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care............................. 7-2

Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4

Armrest

Rear armrest pocket.................................. 2-37

Ashtray (See cigarette lighter and ashtray)...... 2-30

Audible reminders............................................ 2-16

Audio operation precautions ............................ 4-16

Audio system ................................................... 4-14

Steering wheel switch for audio control.... 4-28

Autochanger

Compact Disc (CD) .................................... 4-25

Autolight system.............................................. 2-22

Automatic

Anti-glare inside mirror ............................. 3-32

Automatic adjusting function..................... 2-41

Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-42

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)............. 8-13

Drive positioner ........................................ 3-34

Driving with automatic transmission... 5-6, 5-12

Avoiding collision and rollover........................... 5-5

Battery............................................................. 8-16

Battery saver system................................. 2-23

Before starting the engine................................ 5-10

Belts (See drive belts)...................................... 8-19

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ............. 4-30

Booster seats ................................................... 1-31

Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .................... 5-26

Brake and clutch fluid............................... 8-14

Brake booster........................................... 8-24

Brake fluid ................................................ 8-14

Brake pedal .............................................. 8-23

Brake pedal check .................................... 8-23

Brake system ............................................ 5-26

Parking brake check ......................... 5-19, 8-23

Parking brake operation ............................ 5-19

Warning light ............................................ 2-10

Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-22

Brightness control, Instrument panel............... 2-24

Bulb check/instrument panel............................. 2-9

Bulb replacement............................................. 8-31

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .... 9-2

Car phone or CB radio..................................... 4-29

Card holder ..................................................... 2-38

CD care and cleaning....................................... 4-27

Child restraints................................................. 1-18

Booster seats............................................. 1-31

Installation on front passenger seat .......... 1-28

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

Installation on rear seat outboard or

center positions ........................................ 1-20

Precautions on child restraints .................. 1-18

Top tether strap anchor point locations..... 1-27

Child safety ...................................................... 1-12

Child safety rear door lock................................. 3-5

Chimes

Audible reminders ..................................... 2-16

Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-13

Cigarette lighter and ashtray ........................... 2-30

Circuit breaker, Fusible link............................. 8-26

Cleaning exterior and interior ..................... 7-2, 7-4

Clock ............................................................... 2-29

Clutch fluid ...................................................... 8-14

Coat hook........................................................ 2-38

Cold weather driving........................................ 5-30

Command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone

System) ........................................................... 4-36

Compact Disc (CD) changer operation.............. 4-25

Compass display ............................................... 2-6

Console box .................................................... 2-36

Control panel buttons (models with navigation

system) ............................................................. 4-2

Controls

Control panel buttons (display with

navigation system)...................................... 4-2

Heater and air conditioner controls

(automatic)................................................ 4-10

Steering wheel audio controls .................. 4-28

Coolant

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants ................................................... 9-2

Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9

Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8

Corrosion protection .......................................... 7-5

Cruise control .................................................. 5-20

Cup holder....................................................... 2-32

Curtain side-impact air bag system (See

supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag systems) ........................... 1-48

Daytime running light system .......................... 2-24

Defroster switch, Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch .................................... 2-20

Dimensions and weights ................................... 9-9

Display controls (See control panel buttons),

With navigation system ..................................... 4-2

Door open warning light ................................... 2-11

Door Pockets.................................................... 2-31

Drive belts ....................................................... 8-19

Drive positioner, Automatic.............................. 3-34

Driving

All-wheel drive (AWD) safety precautions .... 5-6

Cold weather driving................................. 5-30

Driving with automatic transmission... 5-6, 5-12

Driving with manual transmission....... 5-7, 5-16

Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2

Economy, Fuel.................................................. 5-22

Emission control information label ................... 9-12

Emission control system warranty ................... 9-24

Engine

Before starting the engine......................... 5-10

Break-in schedule ..................................... 5-22

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants ................................................... 9-2

Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9

Changing engine oil and filter.................... 8-11

Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8

Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10

Coolant temperature gauge......................... 2-4

Engine block heater .................................. 5-32

Engine compartment check locations.......... 8-7

Engine cooling system................................ 8-8

Engine oil.................................................. 8-10

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-5

Engine oil viscosity ..................................... 9-5

Engine serial number ................................. 9-11

Engine specifications.................................. 9-8

If your vehicle overheats............................ 6-11

Starting the engine .................................... 5-11

Entry/exit function, Automatic drive

positioner ........................................................ 3-34

Event data recorders........................................ 9-26

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)......................... 5-2

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........... 9-11

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter .......................... 8-20

Changing engine oil and filter.................... 8-11

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher

switch)............................................................. 2-25

Flat tire.............................................................. 6-2

Flat tire, Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)............................................................... 5-3

Flat towing....................................................... 9-22

10-2

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

Floor mat cleaning............................................. 7-4

Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)............. 8-13

Brake and clutch fluid............................... 8-14

Brake fluid ................................................ 8-14

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants ................................................... 9-2

Engine coolant............................................ 8-8

Engine oil.................................................. 8-10

Power steering fluid .................................. 8-13

Window washer fluid ................................. 8-15

FM-AM-SATELLITE radio with compact disc (CD)

changer ........................................................... 4-22

Fog light switch ............................................... 2-25

Front passenger air bag and status light.......... 1-44

Front power seat adjustment.............................. 1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants ................................................... 9-2

Fuel economy............................................ 5-22

Fuel economy information (display) ............ 4-4

Fuel-filler cap............................................ 3-28

Fuel-filler door .......................................... 3-28

Fuel octane rating....................................... 9-3

Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3

Gauge ......................................................... 2-5

Fuses............................................................... 8-25

Fusible links.................................................... 8-26

Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal

Transceiver...................................................... 2-46

Gas cap........................................................... 3-28

Gauge................................................................ 2-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge.............. 2-4

Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5

Odometer.................................................... 2-3

Speedometer .............................................. 2-3

Tachometer................................................. 2-4

General maintenance......................................... 8-2

Glove box ........................................................ 2-35

Glove box (upper) ............................................ 2-35

Glove box lock................................................. 2-35

Golf bag stowing ............................................. 2-39

Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth ............ 4-30

Hazard warning flasher switch......................... 2-25

Head restraints .................................................. 1-8

Headlights

Bulb replacement...................................... 8-33

Headlight switch........................................ 2-21

Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-21

Heated seats ................................................... 2-26

Heater

Engine block heater .................................. 5-32

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ...... 4-10

HomeLink Universal Transceiver .................... 2-46

Hood release ................................................... 3-24

Hook, Coat hook.............................................. 2-38

Horn ................................................................ 2-26

How to stop alarm, Vehicle security................. 2-18

Ignition switch

(except Intelligent Key system) ................... 5-6

Automatic transmission models .......... 5-6, 5-12

Key positions.............................................. 5-8

Manual transmission models .............. 5-7, 5-16

Immobilizer system.......................................... 2-18

In-cabin microfilter........................................... 4-13

Indicator lights................................................. 2-14

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

Engine start........................................ 5-8, 5-10

Inside

Automatic anti-glare mirror ....................... 3-32

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ................... 9-25

Instrument brightness control.......................... 2-24

Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2

Instrument pocket ............................................ 2-31

Intelligent Key system

Engine starting .......................................... 3-14

Key operating range .................................. 3-16

Key operation............................................. 3-11

Mechanical key and valet key ................... 3-23

Operating the engine................................. 3-14

Remote keyless operation......................... 3-20

Trouble-shooting guide.............................. 3-19

Warning light............................................. 2-12

Warning signals......................................... 3-17

Intelligent Key warning light............................. 2-12

Interior light replacement ................................ 8-33

Interior lights .................................................. 2-44

Interior trunk lid release .................................. 3-27

ISOFIX child restraint........................................ 1-25

10-3

w06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X

Jump starting .................................................... 6-8

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system (See

Intelligent Key system).............................. 3-20

Without Intelligent Key system (See remote

keyless entry system).................................. 3-5

Keys .................................................................. 3-2

Labels

Air bag warning labels ............................... 1-51

Air conditioner specification label ............. 9-13

Emission control information label ............ 9-12

Engine serial number ................................. 9-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label..... 9-11

Tire and Loading Information label ............ 9-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ........... 9-10

LATCH (Lower Anthors and Tethers for

CHildren) system .............................................. 1-25

License plate, Installing front license plate ...... 9-13

Light

Air bag warning light.................................. 1-51

Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-31

Fog light switch......................................... 2-25

Headlight switch........................................ 2-21

Headlights Bulb replacement .................... 8-33

Interior lights............................................ 2-44

Map lights ................................................ 2-44

Personal lights.......................................... 2-45

Replacement.............................................. 8-31

Room light................................................ 2-44

Trunk light................................................ 2-46

Vanity mirror light..................................... 2-46

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders........................................... 2-9, 2-14

Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-21

Lights, Exterior and interior light

replacement..................................................... 8-33

Loading information (See vehicle loading

information) ..................................................... 9-14

Lock

Door locks .................................................. 3-3

Glove box lock .......................................... 2-35

Power door lock.......................................... 3-3

Trunk lid ................................................... 3-25

Low fuel warning light...................................... 2-12

Low tire pressure warning light........................ 2-12

Maintenance

Battery ...................................................... 8-16

General maintenance.................................. 8-2

Inside the vehicle ....................................... 8-4

Maintenance information (display) .............. 4-5

Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5

Maintenance requirements.......................... 8-2

Outside the vehicle..................................... 8-3

Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-17

Under the hood and vehicle ....................... 8-4

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ...................... 2-15

Map lights....................................................... 2-44

Mechanical key (for Intelligent Key system) ..... 3-23

Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner .... 3-35

Meters and gauges............................................ 2-3

Meters and gauges, Instrument brightness

control............................................................. 2-24

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror............. 3-32

Outside mirror control............................... 3-33

Outside mirrors......................................... 3-33

New vehicle break-in........................................ 5-22

Odometer .......................................................... 2-3

Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants ................................................... 9-2

Changing engine oil and filter.................... 8-11

Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10

Engine oil.................................................. 8-10

Engine oil viscosity ..................................... 9-5

Operating the engine (Intelligent Key

system) ............................................................ 3-14

Outside mirror control ..................................... 3-33

Outside mirrors................................................ 3-33

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats................... 6-11

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information...................................................... 9-26

10-4

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Parking

Brake check.............................................. 8-23

Parking brake check .................................. 5-19

Parking brake operation ............................ 5-19

Parking on hills ......................................... 5-19

Parking/parking on hills .................................. 5-24

Personal lights................................................. 2-45

Phone

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ...... 4-30

Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-29

Power

Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-2

Power door lock.......................................... 3-3

Power outlet ............................................. 2-29

Power steering fluid .................................. 8-13

Power steering system .............................. 5-25

Power windows......................................... 2-39

Precautions

All-wheel drive (AWD) driving safety............ 5-6

Audio operation......................................... 4-16

Braking precautions .................................. 5-26

Child restraints .......................................... 1-18

Cruise control ........................................... 5-20

Maintenance ............................................... 8-5

Seat belt usage........................................... 1-9

Supplemental restraint system .................. 1-36

When starting and driving........................... 5-2

Push starting ................................................... 6-10

Radio

Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-29

Steering wheel switch for audio control.... 4-28

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)

test (US only)................................................... 9-25

Rear active steer (RAS) system......................... 5-29

Rear armrest pocket......................................... 2-37

Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock........ 3-5

Rear power point ............................................. 2-29

Rear seat adjustment ......................................... 1-5

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.............................................................. 2-20

Recorders, Event data...................................... 9-26

Registering your vehicle in another country ..... 9-10

Remote keyless entry system

Except Intelligent Key system...................... 3-5

For Intelligent Key system......................... 3-20

Reporting safety defects (US only)................... 9-24

Roadside assistance program............................ 6-2

Rollover ............................................................. 5-5

Room light....................................................... 2-44

Safety

Child seat belts.......................................... 1-12

Reporting safety defects (US only) ............ 9-24

Towing safety............................................ 9-19

Seat

Belt warning light........................................ 1-9

Belt warning light and chime..................... 2-13

Seat adjustment

Front power seat adjustment....................... 1-2

Rear seat adjustment................................... 1-5

Seat belt(s)

Child safety................................................ 1-12

Infants ....................................................... 1-12

Injured persons.......................................... 1-13

Larger children........................................... 1-13

Precautions on seat belt usage ................... 1-9

Pregnant women ........................................ 1-13

Pre-tensioner seat belt system .................. 1-50

Seat belt cleaning ....................................... 7-5

Seat belt extenders.................................... 1-17

Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-17

Seat belts.................................................... 1-9

Seat belt warning light .............................. 2-13

Shoulder belt guide ................................... 1-17

Shoulder belt height adjustment................ 1-16

Small children............................................ 1-12

Three-point type with retractor................... 1-13

Seat(s)

Driver-side memory................................... 3-34

Heated seats............................................. 2-26

Seats........................................................... 1-2

Secondary trunk lid release ............................. 3-27

Security system, Vehicle security system ......... 2-17

Security systems (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer

System), Engine start....................................... 2-18

Security systems (See vehicle security

system) ............................................................ 2-17

Selector lever, Shift lock release ...................... 5-15

Servicing air conditioner.......................... 4-10, 4-14

Shift lock release, Transmission ....................... 5-15

10-5

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Shifting

Automatic transmission ...................... 5-6, 5-12

Manual transmission .......................... 5-7, 5-16

Shoulder belt guide .......................................... 1-17

Shoulder belt height adjustment ...................... 1-16

Side air bag system (See supplemental side

air bag and curtain side-impact air bag

systems) .......................................................... 1-48

SNOW mode switch ......................................... 2-27

Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-19

Speedometer ..................................................... 2-3

Starting

Before starting the engine......................... 5-10

Jump starting.............................................. 6-8

Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2

Push starting............................................. 6-10

Starting the engine .................................... 5-11

Status light, Front passenger air bag ............... 1-44

Steering

Power steering fluid .................................. 8-13

Power steering system .............................. 5-25

Rear active steer (RAS) system.................. 5-29

Steering wheel switch for audio

controls .................................................... 4-28

Tilting steering wheel................................ 3-30

Storage ............................................................ 2-31

Stowing golf bags............................................ 2-39

Sun shade ....................................................... 2-42

Sun visors ....................................................... 3-32

Sunglasses holder ........................................... 2-32

Sunroof ........................................................... 2-42

Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-42

Supplemental air bag warning labels................ 1-51

Supplemental air bag warning light.......... 1-51, 2-14

Supplemental restraint system......................... 1-36

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ...................................................... 1-36

Supplemental side and curtain side-impact

air bag systems ............................................... 1-48

Switch

Autolight switch........................................ 2-22

Fog light switch......................................... 2-25

Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-25

Headlight switch........................................ 2-21

Ignition switch (except Intelligent Key

system)....................................................... 5-6

Ignition switch automatic transmission

models ............................................... 5-6, 5-12

Ignition switch manual transmission

models ............................................... 5-7, 5-16

Power door lock switch............................... 3-4

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch....................................................... 2-20

Steering wheel switch for audio control.... 4-28

Turn signal switch..................................... 2-24

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch....................................................... 2-28

Tachometer........................................................ 2-4

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant

temperature gauge ............................................ 2-4

Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System),

Engine start ..................................................... 2-18

Three way catalyst............................................. 5-3

Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 3-30

Tire

Flat tire....................................................... 6-2

Pressure, Low tire pressure warning

light .......................................................... 2-12

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 5-3

Uniform tire quality grading...................... 9-23

Tires

Spare tire ................................................. 8-48

Tire and Loading Information label ............ 9-12

Tire chains................................................ 8-44

Tire dressing............................................... 7-3

Tire pressure............................................. 8-37

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) ................................................. 5-3, 6-2

Tire rotation.............................................. 8-45

Types of tires............................................ 8-43

Wheel/tire size ........................................... 9-9

Wheels and tires....................................... 8-37

Top tether strap child restraints....................... 1-26

Towing

Flat towing................................................ 9-22

Tow truck towing....................................... 6-12

Towing a trailer ......................................... 9-18

Towing load/specification chart................. 9-18

Towing safety............................................ 9-19

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system ............. 5-3

Trailer towing................................................... 9-18

Transceiver, HomeLink Universal

Transceiver...................................................... 2-46

Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)............. 8-13

Driving with automatic transmission... 5-6, 5-12

Driving with manual transmission....... 5-7, 5-16

Transmission selector lever lock release.... 5-15

10-6

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Transmitter

With Intelligent Key system (See

Intelligent Key system).............................. 3-20

Without Intelligent Key system (See remote

keyless entry system).................................. 3-5

Traveling or registering your vehicle in another

country ............................................................ 9-10

Trip computer information (display) ................... 4-5

Troubleshooting guide

Audio system............................................ 4-20

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ....... 4-41

Intelligent Key system .............................. 3-19

Trunk

Interior trunk lid release ........................... 3-27

Light......................................................... 2-46

Secondary trunk lid release ...................... 3-27

Trunk lid ................................................... 3-25

Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-24

Underbody cleaning........................................... 7-3

Uniform tire quality grading............................. 9-23

Up-shift indicator (MT models).......................... 5-17

Up-shift indicator setting (MT models)............... 2-3

Valet key (for Intelligent Key system)............... 3-23

Vanity mirror light ........................................... 2-46

Vehicle

Dimensions and weights............................. 9-9

Identification number (VIN)........................ 9-10

Loading information .................................. 9-14

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).............. 6-15

Security system ......................................... 2-17

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch....................................................... 2-28

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system...... 5-28

Ventilators......................................................... 4-9

Voice command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free

Phone System) ................................................ 4-36

Walk-in mechanism............................................ 1-4

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels............. 1-51

Warning light

Air bag warning light ......................... 1-51, 2-14

All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light ............ 2-9

Anti-lock brake warning light..................... 2-10

Brake warning light................................... 2-10

Door open warning light ............................ 2-11

Intelligent Key warning light...................... 2-12

Low fuel warning light............................... 2-12

Low tire pressure warning light ................. 2-12

Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-13

Warning lights................................................... 2-9

Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch .......... 2-25

Warning, Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)........................................................ 5-3, 6-2

Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders.......................................................... 2-9

Warranty, Emission control system warranty.... 9-24

Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer

switch .............................................................. 2-19

Washing ............................................................ 7-2

Waxing .............................................................. 7-2

Weights (See dimensions and weights) ............. 9-9

Wheel/tire size.................................................. 9-9

Wheels and tires.............................................. 8-37

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels................. 7-3

Wheels, Rear active steer (RAS) system ........... 5-29

Window washer fluid........................................ 8-15

Window(s)

Automatic adjusting function..................... 2-41

Cleaning ..................................................... 7-3

Power windows......................................... 2-39

Windshield wiper and washer switch ............... 2-19

Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch......... 2-19

Wiper blades............................................. 8-21

Xenon headlights ............................................. 2-21

10-7

w06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

10-8

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Sedan models

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

For improved vehicle performance,

INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with an octane rating of

at least 91 AKI number (Research octane

number 96).

Coupe models

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-

Knock Index) number (Research octane

number 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, un-

leaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane

number 91) may be temporarily used, but

only under the following precautions:

OHave the fuel tank filled only partially

with unleaded regular gasoline, and

fill up with unleaded premium gaso-

line as soon as possible.

OAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt

acceleration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-

line is recommended.

CAUTION

OUsing a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission con-

trol system, and may also affect the war-

ranty coverage.

OUnder no circumstances should a leaded

gasoline be used, because this will dam-

age the three-way catalyst.

ODo not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on E-85

fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel

system components and is not covered

by the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capaci-

ties and recommended fuel/lubricants” in

the “9. Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

OAPI Certification Mark

OAPI grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I

& II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Con-

serving

OILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III

OSAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for

all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30

viscosity oil may be used for ambient

temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-

sumer information” section for engine oil

and oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See Tire and Loading Information label af-

fixed to the inside of the driver side

center pillar.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN

PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of

vehicle use, follow the recommendations

outlined in the “Break-in schedule” Infor-

mation found in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section of this Owner’s Manual.

Follow these recommendations for the fu-

ture reliability and economy of your new

vehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Engine oil 8-10

2. Meters and gauges 2-3

3. Hood release 3-24

4. Seat 1-2

5. Seat belt 1-9

6. Key 3-2

7. Spare tire 6-4, 8-48

8. Fuel 3-28, 9-2

9. Audio system 4-14

Heater and air conditioner 4-10

10. Battery 8-16

11. Engine coolant 8-8

12. Windshield washer fluid 8-15

STI0408

QUICK REFERENCE

w06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

2006 G Coupe/Sedan Owner's Manual Infiniti G35 Sedan Owners

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation